Home

Digital Super Hybrid System Programming Guide

1. Buttons Soft Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 2 Press SHIFT to alternate SKP CLR NEXT SKP PREV Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 3 Press SHIFT to alternate gt SEL NEXTT lt SEL PREV Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 4 Press SHIFT to alternate A B e hs So b c Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 5 Press SHIFT to alternate SKP SEL NEXT F SKP CLR PREV Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft2 Soft3 SHIFT Programming Instructions 11 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons For overlay buttons refer to Using the Overlay below Throughout programming you will see instructions such as Press PREV If you use soft buttons this means press SHIFT release SHIFT and then press Soft 3 The PREV function is performed Note If you use soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press the following buttons you may press soft buttons shown below Instructions Soft button SELECT SEL SEL or SEL CLEAR CLR Using the Overlay A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay shou
2. Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 1 02 2nd hundred extension block 2 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 9 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 0 19 Outside line group line access 8 20 System speed dialling x 21 Station speed dialling 3 22 Station speed dialling programming 30 23 Doorphone call 31 24 Paging external 32 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 33 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup outside line 4 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve outside line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 Door opener 55 2 2 System Programming General Programming 53 2 2 System Programming Feature Number List Number Feature Default 38 External feature access 6 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting 70 41 Outgoing message 36 42 Call forwarding do not disturb 710 43 Call pickup deny 720 44 Data line security 730 45 Call waiting OHCA whisper OHCA 731 46 Executive busy override deny 733 47 Pickup dialling 74 48 Absent message 750 49 Timed reminder 76 50 Electronic station lockout 77 51 Day Lunch
3. ce ccccceeseceeececseeeeaeceeeeeceeeesaecensaeeeeeeeeeaees 379 764 El E amp M Pulse Length Answer cceeccecssccesseeceeeeeceeeeeaeceeeeeceeeesaeceeaeeeeeeeeeaees 380 765 El E amp M Pulse Length Clear ccccecssccesseceseeesseceesaeceaaeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeseaeceeeeeeeeeeeaes 381 766 El Meter Pulse Detection Mode oooooooocononncononononononconononannnnnonononnnnnononononnononnnnnnnnnnos 382 767 El Meter Pulse Detection Bit Position oooocccnnnocncnonoccnnnnnonnnnconononncnoncnnncnnncnnccnnnoss 383 768 El Meter Pulse Detection Length oooconnnccnnnicinnncccnnonononnconnnccnnnnc nono non nocnnnccnnnc conan 384 769 El DSP Gain DTMF TransmMit ainoo a E EAE RES 385 770 El DSP Gain DTMF Receive ccoooccccoocnncnononncnnnnnnnnnononnncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnns 386 771 El DSP Gain MFC R2 Transom aeaiiai aa eaea iiei iaa ina 387 772 El DSP Gain MPC R2 RECONE Janien t ita hie ae kt AAEE A E 388 713b EL Frame Error Detection siii Ain a a a A a aa iS hat 389 774 ELEn Rates an a EA is 390 Le ELANES emice Modest ii TR O E ERANA 391 776 El ANI Maximum Digits 20 00 ccc cccccecenceceseessseceesecseaeeceaeeceeeesseceeeaecseaaeceaeeeeeeeaas 392 777 El MFC R2 Forward Timer oococcnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnononcnnononnnnnononnononn nono nocononnn EAE ana iNe 393 778 El MFC R2 Backward TiMeT ccoooooccnonncccnononnccnonnnnnnnnnnncnnn nn nono nnnocnnon E 394 779 El MFC R2 Disappearance Timer
4. 410 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming alarm is not answered Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 05 12 Selects the SMDR format for an 0 lt Incoming gt 1 SMDR incoming call with Caller ID The caller no caller s number only or caller s number 1 lt I gt caller no only or caller s number and name is name selected 13 Enables or disables the SMDR printout 0 enable 1 SMDR for RC when an incoming call occurs 1 disable and AN when an incoming call is answered 14 Selects the result when a call from DISA 0 IRNA 1 None DID is invalid 1 reorder tone is sent 15 Selects the result of pressing 0 0 Operators 1 and 1 Operator default calls operators 1 and 2 at the 2 same time or Operator 1 first and then simultaneously Operator 2 if Operator 1 is busy 1 Operator 1 first and then Operator 2 16 Enables or disables the SMDR printout 0 enable 1 Timed Reminder when the Timed Reminder starts and the 1 disable Optional Programming 411 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 06 1 Determines whether the account code is 0 not printed out 1 Account Code printed out or not shown in dots by the 1 printed out Entry SMDR 2 3 Reserved 4 Enables or d
5. Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 113 2 2 System Programming 141 Charge Rate Decimal Point Assignment Description Assigns how many decimal places to set for the charge rate Selection Number of decimal places 0 through 8 Default 2 Programming 1 Enter 141 Display 141 DECI POINT 2 Press NEXT Display example Fraction place 2 3 Enter the desired number To delete the current entry press CLEAR Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e This programme is used when the rate is assigned in programme 142 Charge Rate Assignment The change in this programme is reflected automatically to programme 142 e According to this assignment the charge is displayed during the conversation and shown on the SMDR print out e This assignment is used for the charge fee reference Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference 114 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 142 Charge Rate Assignment Description Assigns the rate to each outside line Selection e Outside line number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Desired number 10 digits max including the decimal point Default All outside lines 0 00 Programming 1 Enter 142 Display 142 CHARGE RATE 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can als
6. Display example COS1 LVL2 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Ifyou try to execute the CO button programming while on level 2 a warning tone is heard and the initial programming display appears e A ringer frequency for each CO button cannot be changed on level 2 e The programming assigned on 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment can be overwritten regardless of the level of this programming General Programming 239 2 6 COS Programming Features Guide References Station Programming 240 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Description EXtra Device Port XDP allows a single line telephone SLT to be connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone DPT This programme assigns which jacks are XDP The SLT and DPT of the programmed jack work as independent extensions Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all jacks e Disable Enable Default All jacks Disable Programming 1 Enter 600 Display 600 XDP PORT 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6
7. 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each phantom extension number has two through four digits consisting of numbers 0 through 9 e The first one or two digits of the phantom extension numbers are subject to programme 100 Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks e Phantom extension numbers and other extension numbers should be different Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 General Programming 91 2 2 System Programming To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 181 through 184 KX TD1232 165 through 188 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 198 291 through 294 296 through 299 Features Guide References Phantom Extension 92 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 125 Area Code Assignment Description Ass
8. Note If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button substitute it with the PAUSE button e If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM or PAUSE button is pressed it is cancelled The User Password is not shown on the display The password can be changed by system programming Refer to Section 2 2 120 User Password e During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension e Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 22 Programming Instructions 1 6 Programming Example 1 6 Programming Example Programming Example The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode and that you will employ method b of Going to another programme address in Section 1 3 Programming Methods Example programme 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set Sample of Description Explanation 2 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 1 Programme address 2 Programme title 3 Provides a more detailed description of the programme Description Y Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 500 numbers from 000 through 499 4 Shows you choices that you can assign Selection e Speed dial number 000 through 499 5 Shows you the default factory setting 6 Shows you programming procedures step by step e Telephone
9. Permanent KX TD1232 All ports Permanent 432 Default Values Programme Default 425 ISDN Configuration KX TD816 Ports 05 and 06 Multipoint Other ports Point KX TD1232 All ports Point 426 ISDN Data Link Mode KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call Other ports Permanent KX TD1232 All ports Permanent 427 ISDN TEI Mode KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Automatic Other ports Fix 0 KX TD1232 All ports Fix 0 428 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber All ports Disable Number 429 ISDN Extension Progress Tone All ports Disable 454 MSN Assignment All ports All locations Not stored 455 456 Extension Ringing Assignment All ports All locations Disable Day Night Day Night for ISDN 460 PRI Configuration B channel number 0 line CRC4 Enable 721 PRI El Reference CO All outside lines PRI El line CO 09 611 DDI Number Extension Number All jacks Not stored Conversion 612 DDI Number Floating Number All floating stations Blank Conversion 613 ISDN Class of Service All ports COS 1 614 615 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line All ports All outside lines Enabl Day Night Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension 616 DDI Number ISDN Extension Number All ports Blank Conversion 617 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for All jacks DDI Extension
10. Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e 10 pps 20 pps Default All outside lines 10 pps Programming 1 Enter 403 Display 403 PULSE SPEED 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 10pps 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 e The pulse speed required is determined by the outside line or PBX line General Programming 175 2 5 Outside Line Programming e Programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 7 and bits 12 and 11 are used to select a pulse break ratio and inter digit pause if needed Features Guide References Dial Type Selection 176 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 404 DTMF Time Description An outside line set to DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency mode in program
11. 1 through 5 Default ls Programming 1 Enter 204 Display 204 PICKUP DIAL 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic dialling process takes place Features Guide References Pickup Dialling 130 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 205 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an outside party If an outside call is originated or answered by a programmed extension user and the timer expires the call is disconnected Selection Time minutes 1 through 64 Default 10 min Programming 1 Enter 205 Display 205 EXT CO TIME 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e This time out applies to extensions to which limited call duration is assigned by programme 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit e This time cannot be set to zero or be left empty Features Guide References None General Programming 131 2 3 Timer Programming 206 Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between two outs
12. 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Ifthe charge limitation is set 0 no restriction is applied e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e To assign all jack numbers to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e The displayed currency can be programmed by 144 Currency Assignment General Programming 49 2 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Budget Management Charge Fee Reference 50 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 017 DISA TIE User Codes Description Assigns the Direct Inward System Access DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service COS to each code The code COS determines the toll restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller Warning When you enable the Outside to Outside Line Call feature of DISA function if a third party discovers the password a DISA User Code of the system you have a risk that they will make illegal phone calls using your telephone line and the cost may be charged to your account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points 1 Carefully maintain the secrecy of the password 2 Specify a complicated password as long and random as you can make it 3 Change the password frequently Selection DISA TIE user code number 01 thro
13. 8 Press END NJ Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 276 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 813 Floating Number Assignment Description Assigns the floating numbers for External Pagers DISA Direct Inward System Access messages modem and extension groups These numbers can be used in the same way extension numbers are used for station access Selection e Floating station Pager1 through 4 DISA1 DISA2 MODEM E Grp 1 through 8 Pager2 through 4 are available for the KX TD1232 only e Floating number 2 through 4 digits Default Pager 1 196 Pager 2 197 Pager 3 296 Pager 4 297 DISA 1 198 DISA 2 298 MODEM2 299 E Grp 1 191 E Grp 2 192 E Grp 3 193 E Grp 4 194 E Grp 5 291 E Grp 6 292 E Grp 7 293 E Grp 8 294 Programming 1 Enter 813 Display 813 FLOATING 2 Press NEXT to programme Pager 1 Display example Pagerl EXT196 To programme another floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 3 Enter a floating number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new floating number 4 Press STORE 5 To programme another floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A floating number is composed of two through four numerical digits 0 through 9 e The first
14. 816 SMDR Output Mode Description Assigns the SMDR output mode There are two standards available Regular and Charge Selection Regular Charge Default Regular Programming 1 Enter 816 Display 816 SMDR MODE 2 Press NEXT Display example SMDR Regular 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e Select the output mode used by your SMDR e Ifyou assign for Charge you can select the display in Meter in Charge through programme 143 Charge Display Selection e When Charge is selected the assignment in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 05 bit 12 is ignored and lt I gt caller no is printed out in the SMDR Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR General Programming 281 2 8 Resource Programming 817 KX TD197 KX TD198 Baud Rate Set Description Assigns the KX TD197 KX TD198 standard There are two standards available BELL and CCITT V 34 Selection BELL V 34 9600 V 34 14400 V 34 19200 V 34 28800 V 34 33600 Default V 34 33600 Programming 1 Enter 817 Display for KX TD1232 817 TD197 TYPE Display for KX TD816 817 TD198 TYPE 2 Press NEXT Display example Mast V 34 33600 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press NEXT Display example Slave V 34 33600 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
15. Break Night service mode 78 52 Parallel telephone mode 39 53 Background music external 35 54 LCS password 799 55 Call log incoming 56 56 Call log lock incoming 57 57 Timed reminder remote 7 58 Log in log out 45 59 Automatic callback busy cancel 46 60 Walking COS 47 61 Reserved 62 System working report 794 63 70 Quick dial location numbers 1 through 8 None 71 72 Reserved None 73 TIE Line access number None 74 89 Other PBX Extension 01 through 16 None 90 Paging deny 721 91 Hotel application room status 736 54 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 1 For KX TD1232X 9 Others 0 For KX TD1232X 0 Others 9 Selection e Selection number 01 through 91 See Feature Number List for the corresponding features e Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 74 through 89 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 73 and 90 through 91 Default See Feature Number List Programming 1 Enter 100 Display 100 FLEX NUMBER 2 Press NEXT Display Select NO gt 3 Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 1 4 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another selection press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the de
16. Display example BGM Musicl 6 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number 7 Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions e The music source is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one music source can be installed for KX TD1232 two music sources can be installed per system Music sources 1 and 2 are connected to the Master System 3 and 4 are to the Slave if available Any music source can be used by either system e The system is provided with an internal music source By default setting internal music source is used as Music Source 1 It is possible to select external music source for Music Source 1 in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 Bit 10 General Programming 267 2 8 Resource Programming e To disable music press CLEAR in steps 3 and 6 e Programme 804 External Pager BGM is used to enable disable BGM for each external pager Features Guide References Background Music BGM 268 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 804 External Pager BGM Description Used to determine which external pagers will receive Background Music BGM External BGM is turned on and off by the operator or manager Selection e External pager number KX TD816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 4 e Disable sends no BGM Enable sends BGM Default All external pagers Disable Programming 1 Enter 8
17. E EXT A 16 SLT KX TD1232 e Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C 4 C0 82 2 S0 S6 6 S0 PR 1 PRI BD 4 DID Pulse DTMF MD 4 DID MFC EM 4 ES M EL 1 El El 8 EXT1 E2 8 EXT2 Al 16 SLT1 A2 16 SLT2 Master system only PR EL Default KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display 109 EXPAND C El 2 Press NEXT Display example Master C E Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press m gt to programme Area 2 if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area 2 is displayed Press STORE Press END NADANA U KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 290 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming Display 109 EXPAND C El 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System To programme Slave press NEXT again Display example Master C E1 E2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press gt to programme another Area if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 10 NA 90 uy 8 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slave C E1 E2 9 Repeat steps 3 through 7 if required 10 Press END Conditions e The following units can be
18. EL 1 El El 8 EXT1 E2 8 EXT2 Al 16 SLT1 A2 16 SLT2 Master system only PR EL Default KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display 109 EXPAND C El 2 Press NEXT Display example Master C E Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press m to programme Area 2 if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area 2 is displayed Press STORE Press END NANA W KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 342 El Programming 4 1 System Programming Display 109 EXPAND C El 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System To programme Slave press NEXT again Display example Master C E1 E2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press gt to programme another Area if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 10 NA 90 uy 8 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slave C E1 E2 9 Repeat steps 3 through 7 if required 10 Press END Conditions e The following units can be installed in the slots C 4 CO lines KX TD180 S2 2 ISDN SO lines KX TD280 S6 6 ISDN SO lines KX TD286 PR 1 PRI ISDN line KX TD290 BD 4 DID lines
19. ISDN Programming 331 3 4 Extension Programming e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 Features Guide References Class of Service COS 332 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 614 615 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension Description Determines which outside lines can be accessed by an ISDN extension in both the day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned outside lines Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Enabl enable Disab disable Default All ports All outside lines Enabl Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 614 for day or 615 for night Display example 614 ISDN DAY OUT 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 C001 Enabl 4 Enter the desired outside line number or keep pressing gt or lt Q until the desired outside line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another jack pres
20. KX TD816 Ports 05 and 06 Multipoint Other ports Point KX TD1232 All ports Point Programming 1 Enter 425 Display 425 ACCESS MODE 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Point 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port select Point If multiple equipment are connected select Multipoint e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 ISDN Programming 311 3 3 ISDN Line Programming e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment is effective Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 312 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 426 ISDN Data Link Mode Description Assigns the data link mode on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports e Permanent Call Default KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call
21. eee ee esceesecsseceeceeccsseeeeeesseeseeseneeeseeeaeeenaes 57 Day Night Service Starting Time 00 cece eee ceeeesecnseeeseceseccseeeeeessesseeseneeeaeeeaeesaaes 58 Automatic Access Outside Line Group ASsignMent cee eeeesceesecsecceseceeeeeeeseeees 60 ACCOUNT Codes A at een en ian ied hea eels 61 Station Muntin amp Ipanema 63 System Password c siiaeccnn AA ia 65 Automatic Hold by CO DSS Button conconnccnnocnnoncnaccnoncnoncnonoconaconncnnncnnn crac conc crac cra 66 Expansion Unit Type cin O UAL HS eee 67 Caller ID Code Setenta te a E 70 Caller ID Name Set minnanna a E a hoe plo leia a ERE aa i 72 NM Stattis DIME Seti tccetcsagcvessetepsecetdct soacetieie estirada lelaesaseteensneerss 73 VM Command DIMF Setecin a E E a E EES 75 Adj st TIME ee e en a a ol aa 77 ROM Version Display ccesessccessecsseeseceseeeseesseecaeceseceseesseesseessaecsaececeseeeeesenaessaeess 78 Voice Mail Number Assignment ceeesceeeeseeceeeeeeseeecaeceseceaecesaeeseeeeeeeseeseneeaaes 79 Voice Mail Extension Number Set eee eseseceeesecnseeesecesecceseeseeceseeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaaes 81 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment 0 ccc eecescesseesecesseeseeeeeeceseeeaeeeseeeaeeseaees 83 User Password A O ee 85 Walking COS PassWord a etnies de 86 UCD Overtlow ss csduc cai lige tds Maen idle al de Aiea anaes 87 UED TimeTableco ias 89 Table of Contents 3 124 Phantom Extension Number Set ooooooononncononconnnonnnnnonnnnon
22. lay Table NO Enter a Time Table number To enter Time Table number 1 you can also press NEXT Disp Keep pres Disp Press gt lay example 1 gt gt gt sing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed lay example 1 S1l gt gt gt gt Repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE Press END General Programming 89 2 2 System Programming Conditions e Sx can be assigned in a space other than in the first only when another Sx is assigned in the first space e An assignment after TR RT or Blank is not available Features Guide References Uniform Call Distribution UCD 90 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Description Assigns the phantom extension numbers Each number will be assigned to a flexible CO or DSS Direct Station Selection button and used as a Phantom Extension button Selection e Location number 001 through 128 e Phantom extension number 2 through 4 digits Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 124 Display 124 PHANTOM 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a phantom extension number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE
23. 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 334 Emergency Dial Number Set Description Stores up to ten emergency call numbers Emergency numbers are not subject to toll restriction Account Code Verified mode and Electronic Station Lockout Selection e Location number 01 through 10 e Emergency number 7 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 334 Display 334 EMERGENCY 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter an emergency number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Each emergency number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS Toll Restriction 164 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 340 TIE Line Routing Table Description The TIE line routing table can be programmed This table is referenced by the system to identify the outside line route when an extension user makes a TIE call A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the first three digits except the TIE line access number of the dialled num
24. 618 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for All ports DDI ISDN Extension Default Values 433 4 El Programming Programme Default 109 Expansion Unit Type KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 418 Outside Line Number Assignment for ISDN El All outside lines Not stored 622 Extension ANI Number All jacks 1 2 Not stored 707 El Clock Mode External 720 El TIE Ringing Service All outside lines TIE 721 PRI El Reference CO All outside lines PRI El line CO 09 722 El Answer Wait Timer All outside lines 1 min 723 El Sending TIE Caller ID All outside lines No 740 El Channel Assignment All El channels Disable 741 El Dial Mode All El channels Pulse 10 742 El CPC IN All El channels 02 743 El CPC OUT All El channels 02 744 El DID Receive Digit All El channels 4 745 El DR2 Receiver All El channels Undefined 747 El Line Coding HDB3 748 El Frame Sequence PCM30 749 El Frame Option C 0 D 1 750 El First Dial Timer DR2 TIE 002 751 El Break 60 752 El Dial Click Tone Yes 753 El Inter Digit Pause 830 ms 754 El Flash Detection 208 1016 434 Default Values Programme Defa
25. Caller ID 72 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 113 VM Status DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF signals RBT ringback tone This signal is sent when calling an extension BT busy tone This is sent when the called extension is busy ROT reorder tone This is sent when the dialled number is invalid DND DND tone This is sent when the other extension has DND assigned Answer This is sent when the other extension answers the call Disconnect This is sent when the other extension hangs up Confirm confirmation tone This is sent when the feature number for Message Waiting Lamp is valid FWD VM RBT FWD to VM ringback tone Not available reserved FWD VM BT FWD to VM busy tone This is sent when the called extension has set Call Forwarding to VPS FWD EXT RBT FWD to extension ringback tone Not available reserved Selection e RBT BT ROT DND Answer Disconnect Confirm FWD VM RBT FWD VM BT FWD EXT RBT e DTMF signal number 3 digits max Default RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 Programming 1 Enter 113 Display 113 VM DTMF CMD 2 Press NEXT to
26. DID Number Conversion Selection Description Selects whether the Direct Inward Dialling DID number is allocated as an extension number or is converted using the Transfer Table Selection EXT Number Transfer Table Default EXT Number Programming 1 Enter 135 Display 135 DID SELECT 2 Press NEXT Display EXT Number 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The DID number is converted from the DID subscriber number using the programmes 433 DID TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit and 434 DID TIE Added Number e Programmes 136 through 139 are required to use the Transfer Table Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 107 2 2 System Programming 136 DID DDI Number Assignment Description Assigns the Direct Inward Dialling DID number which is converted from the DID subscriber number using the programmes 433 DID TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit and 434 DID TIE Added Number And also assigns the Direct Dialling In DDI number If the converted number matches the number assigned in this programme it reaches the destination assigned in programme 137 138 DID DDI Extension Day Night Selection e Location number 001 through 200 DID DDI number 16 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 136 Display 136 DID NUMBER 2 Press
27. Display example TRG1 Small gt Large 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e The default setting Small gt Large often may cause a busy situation between two PBXs as the same line may be seized by both sides simultaneously In this case we recommend changing the setting of either PBX to Large gt Small e To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References None General Programming 211 2 5 Outside Line Programming 441 Voice Path Type Description Assigns the voice path type on an outside line basis Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines 2 wire 4 wire Default All outside lines 2 wire Programming 1 Enter 441 Display 441 V PATH TYPE 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example CO09 2 Wire 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 Press END u Conditio
28. General Programming 63 2 2 System Programming Conditions e Programme 602 Extension Group Assignment is used to assign the extension group members e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection to a Voice Processing System as VM or AA ports e To assign all extension groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for extension group 1 Features Guide References Ring Group Station Hunting Uniform Call Distribution UCD Voice Mail Integration for Inband 64 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 107 System Password Description Assigns the password required for entering System Programming mode and for maintenance from a personal computer Selection Password 4 through 7 digits Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 107 Display 107 SYS PASSWORD 2 Press NEXT Display Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The password can be from four to seven digits long consisting of 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they are not stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer System Programming with Proprietary Telephone General Programming 65 2 2 System Pr
29. Other ports Permanent KX TD1232 All ports Permanent Programming 1 Enter 426 Display 426 LAYER2 MODE 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Permanent 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective ISDN Programming 313 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 314 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 427 ISDN TEI Mode Description Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier TED mode on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports e Fix 0 through 63 Automatic Default KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Automatic Other ports Fix 0 KX TD1232 All ports Fix 0 Programming 1 Enter 427 Display 427 TEI ASSIGN 2 Press NEXT
30. Pause Time All outside line groups 1 5 s 413 Flash Time All outside line groups 600 ms 414 Disconnect Time All outside line groups 1 5 s 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Disable 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment Regular 417 Outside Line Name Assignment All outside lines Not stored 430 DID TIE Format Number Assignment All outside line groups Not stored 431 DID TIE Incoming Assignment All DID TIE formats Wink 432 DID TIE Outgoing Assignment All DID TIE formats Wink 433 DID TIE Subscriber Number Removed All DID TIE formats RMV 0 Digit 434 DID TIE Added Number All DID TIE formats Blank 435 DID TIE Wink Time Out Assignment All DID TIE formats 16 436 Outside to TIE Transfer All outside line groups Disable 437 TIE to Outside Transfer All outside line groups Disable 438 TYE to TIE Transfer All outside line groups Enable 439 TIE Security Type All outside line groups Non 440 Line Hunting Sequence All outside line groups Small gt Large 441 Voice Path Type All outside lines 2 wire 442 Voice Level Transmit All outside lines 3 db 443 Voice Level Receive All outside lines 3 db 444 TIE Receive Dial All outside line ports Yes 428 Default Values Programme Default 445 DID Forward Timer for MFC R2 All DID formats 15 s 446 DID Backward Timer for MFC R2
31. Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 01 Disable Location number Port number 4 Enter an extension number or 0 To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To select Disable press CLEAR Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another port press SELECT and the desired port number oND Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END ISDN Programming 323 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Conditions Each extension number can be 2 through 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 These programmes become available when Multipoint is selected in programme 425 ISDN Configuration For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available Assignable extension numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 003 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Voice Mail extension numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom extension numbers 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers 813 Floating Number Assignment You can assign a MSN as a destination extension In this case add one digit to the ISDN extension number Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISD
32. Press STORE 6 To programme another DID TIE format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID TIE format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each added number has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID El Line Service TIE Line Service 204 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 435 DID TIE Wink Time Out Assignment Description The DID TIE outgoing method can be set to the wink mode in programme 432 DID TIE Outgoing Assignment This programme sets the time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal after an outside line is seized according to your central office service Selection DID TIE format number 1 through 8 X all DID TIE formats Time 1 through 127 X 64 milliseconds is the actual time Default All DID TIE formats 16 Programming 1 Enter 435 Display 435 WINK TIMEOUT 2 Press NEXT Display Format NO gt 3 Enter a DID TIE format number To enter DID TIE format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 16 4 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DID TIE format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID TIE format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty e
33. Press STORE Press END u Conditions None Features Guide References Timed Reminder General Programming 143 2 3 Timer Programming 218 DISA AA Wait Time Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits for a second digit entry If the timer expires the system assumes that the first digit is a DISA Direct Inward System Access built in auto attendant number if assigned in programme 815 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number Selection Time seconds 1 through 5 Default ls Programming 1 Enter 218 Display 218 DISA AA WAIT 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 144 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 219 Call Park Recall Time Description Sets the number of rings before call park recall occurs Call park recall is used to alert an extension that a call has been parked for an extended period of time Selection Number of rings 0 through 48 0 Call Park Recall disabled Default 12 rings Programming 1 Enter 219 Display 219 PARK RECALL 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions e One ring is eq
34. Programming 1 Enter 014 Display 014 VM PORT NAME 2 Press NEXT Display VM Port NO gt 3 Enter a VM number To enter VM number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example VM01 V Mail 01 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name Display example VM01 Voice No 1 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another voice mail port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired voice mail number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Inband 48 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 015 Budget Management Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the extension basis Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 X KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Charge limitation Charge 0 through 99999999 Default All jacks 0 Programming 1 Enter 015 Display 015 BUDGET MNG 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 0 4 Enter a charge limitation To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number
35. Restriction Override modes If Verified All Calls is assigned in programme 508 Account Code Entry Mode an account code is required to make an outside call If Verified Toll Restriction Override is assigned an account code is only required for a toll call and overrides toll restriction Selection Default Location number 001 through 128 Account code 10 digits max All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 105 Display 105 ACCT CODES Press NEXT Display Location NO gt Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored Enter an account code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new account code Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions Each code has a maximum of 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 Programme 508 Account Code Entry Mode is used to select the Account Code Entry mode Account codes having 99 in any part or ending with 9 are invalid as 99 is used as a delimiter when entering an account code General Programming 61 2 2 System Programming Features Guide References Account Code Entry Toll Restriction 62 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type
36. Sets a DR2 signalling type Normal CCITT Option 1 ANSI Option 2 CCITT MFC R2 Group C Option 3 Dialling mode ANSI Receiving mode CCITT This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Normal Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Default Normal Programming 1 Enter 758 Display 758 DR2 SIGNAL 2 Press NEXT Display example Normal 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 374 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 759 El Inter Digit Timer Description Sets a maximum time the system waits before answering a call on the El line assigned to DR2 of option 1 signalling This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time seconds 03 through 15 Default 05 Programming 1 Enter 759 Display 759 INTER DIGIT 2 Press NEXT Display example Inter Digit 05 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 375 4 4 El Line Programming 760 El Bit Position for Dial Pulse Description Sets a bit position for dial pulse on the E1 line assigned to DR2 This programme is available
37. This can be assigned for each outside line group TRG The bits 1 through 8 correspond to TRG 1 through 8 9 16 Reserved Selection e Area code 01 through 10 e Selection See Selection in the explanation table 416 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming Default See Default shown in the explanation table Programming 1 n A Enter 990 Display 990 SYS ADD DATA Press NEXT Display Area NO gt Enter an area code 01 through 10 Display example 0010100011000001 Keep pressing gt or lt to move the cursor to the desired bit Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and enter the new selection 6 To programme another bit repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press STORE 8 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 To programme another area press SELECT and the desired area code 10 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References None Optional Programming 417 5 1 Optional Programming 991 COS Additional Information Description 1 Sets the number of digits allowed to dial out during an analogue outside call on a Class of Service COS basis If an outside party hangs up and the extension user tries to dial out still on the outside line the system will disconnect the line at the time the assigned number of digits are dialled This programme is effective if the Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection is not provided by the
38. it will operate as H e If XH is stored for GETMSG a mailbox number programmed in programme 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the port succeeding the X Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Inband 76 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 115 Adjust Time Description Used to adjust the time for checking the normality of system data Every day at the programmed time the data adjustment is performed Selection e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM Default 1 00 AM Programming 1 Enter 115 Display 115 TIME ADJ M S 2 Press NEXT to programme hour Display example 1 00 AM 3 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new hour 4 Press to programme minute 5 Enter the Minute To change the current entry enter the new minute Press m to programme AM PM Press SELECT for AM or PM Press STORE Press END Se YD A QA Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty e Master and slave systems are synchronised with each other Features Guide References None General Programming 77 2 2 System Programming 116 ROM Version Display Description Confirms the version of ROM of the system Display example PO11A30101A Version Date Selection System number KX TD816 0 KX TD1232 0 Master 1 Slave Default Not applicable
39. oooonoonnccnocicocnnoconocononcnonononoconannncnnn con nc nn nono nannnannnrnnccnnnnos 160 331 ARS Modify Added Number ocooooonncnnnoncconoccnoncconnnconnncnnnnonnnnncnonornnnncnnnc naar conc ccnnncnns 161 332 Extra Entry Table Selection oinei a a aaa aaas 162 333 TRS Entry Code Assignment for Extra Table ooonnionnnnnininnccnnnccnnncnnnonnccnnnconancnnnnnos 163 334 Emergency Dial Number Set oo cccccccccesseceeeceeseceeaaecesaeceeeeeeeeeeeaeseaaeceeaeeeeeeeees 164 340 TIE Line Routing Tablesiccs cscccsssacdsaseteeess cactesiaieeessesdeesbadseasssbdceasaseebecdsectea ptiweseczedes 165 341 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Number cooooconinccinnncninnccnnnnncnnonannnnccnnacanancninnns 167 2 5 Outside Line Programming ccccsssscccsssssccsssssccssssscccsssscccssssscscsssscsssssssccsssssees 169 400 Outside Line Connection Assignment ccccceesceeseeceeeteeeeececeeeeeesaeceaeceeeeeseeeeeesas 169 401 Outside Line Group Assignment oooooonococococoncnnnnnnnncnnnconacona cono nonn conan cnn n cnn c rn na nnnann anna 171 4021 Dial Mode Selectos dla its 173 403 Pulse Speed Selection nuni nni E a N T 175 4041 DIME TIME atada Da a r E icin Magi Maciel ane tern 177 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set ooooonncccnnncccinnccnnonononcnonnncnnonannnnccnnnccnnnnconncrnnnanns 179 406 Caller DIA TN 181 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 00 ee eee eeecesseeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaecsaeceeeenseenes 183
40. x X all COS e Disable no limit Enable limit Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 502 Display 502 EXT CO TIMER 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 4 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Ge Display example COS1 Disable 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 6 9 Press END Conditions e An outside call originated or answered by the programmed extension user is disconnected when the time specified in programme 205 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Time expires Extensions in limited classes cannot establish an outside to outside call that is cannot transfer forward an outside call to another outside line or perform an Unattended Conference e To assign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 Bit 2 is used to programme limited call duration to be done for outgoing calls only 228 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming Features Guide References Call Forwarding Call Transfer Conference General Programming 229 2 6 COS Programming 503 Call Transfer to Outside Line Description Determines which Classes of Services COS are allow
41. you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Regular 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available ISDN Programming 303 3 3 ISDN Line Programming e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 e Lunch break mode will only work when Regular is assigned in this programme Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 304 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 421 DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment Description Assigns the removed digits and added number to a subscriber s number and a DDI number sent from the network Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Removed digits 0 through 16 O no deleting e Added number 4 digits max Default All outside lines Removed digit 0 Added number Not stored Programming 1 Enter 421 Display 421 DDI RMV ADD 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number T
42. 0 db 3 db Default All outside lines 3 db Programming 1 Enter 443 Display 443 V LEVEL RX 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example C009 3db 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 Press END Conditions To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References TIE Line Service 214 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 444 TIE Receive Dial Description Assigns whether the system receives TIE dial numbers on an outside line basis If No is selected the dialled number is treated as a local number and sent to DIL 1 1 or DIL 1 N Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines e Yes No Default All outside line ports Yes Programming 1 Enter 444 Display 444 RECEIVE DIAL 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example CO09 Yes 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 Press END Conditions To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References TIE Line Service General Prog
43. 001 through 200 e Extension number 2 through 4 digits 0 operator Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a programme address 137 for day or 138 for night Display example 137 DID NUM DAY 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To disable the DID press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Assignable numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 003 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Voice Mail numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom numbers 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers 813 Floating Number Assignment For a DID extension a DISA floating number is not assignable 110 General Programming 2 2 System Programming e To use this programme for DID Transfer Table must be selected first in programme 135 DID Number Conversion Selection and then the DID number must be assigned in programme 136 DID DDI Number Assignment e To use this programme for DDI Use must be selected first in programme 154 DID Transf
44. 170 172 197 291 300 325 326 343 346 351 L Line Hunting Sequence 211 Live Call Screening button 38 Live Call Screening Cancel button 38 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment 255 Log In Log Out button 38 Loop CO button 38 60 Lunch Break Group Assignment 259 Lunch Service Starting Ending Time 120 M Mailbox number 253 407 Manager 40 41 44 Manager Extension Assignment 41 Message Waiting button 38 Message Waiting Control 100 Message Waiting lamp 405 Message Waiting Lamp Assignment 102 Message Waiting Port Set 104 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 142 440 Index Message waiting ring type 410 Modem Standard 279 MSN Multiple Subscriber Numbers 317 321 413 MSN Assignment 321 Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN 317 321 413 Music on Hold 267 414 Music Source Use 267 N NEXT button 12 Night button 38 Night Service 57 58 Night Service Access 238 O Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 237 Off Hook Monitor 119 OGM Outgoing Message 141 OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement 237 One Touch Dialling button 38 Operator 41 411 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 41 Option mode 235 Outgoing ANI 299 345 Outgoing Message OGM 141 Outgoing Message Time 141 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night 249 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension 333 Outside Line Connection Assignment 169 Outside Line Group As
45. 1f available e The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the Console Port set in programme 007 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment General Programming 41 2 1 Manager Programming e If the assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port XDP mode the proprietary telephone jack is treated as the manager operator extension Features Guide References Manager Extension Operator 42 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 007 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Description Assigns the jack numbers for the console and the paired extension Selection e Console number KX TD816 1 through 4 KX TD1232 1 through 4 for Master 5 through 8 for Slave e Jack number for Console KX TD816 02 through 16 KX TD1232 02 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave e Jack number for paired extension KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD 1232 01 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave Default All consoles Not stored Programming 1 Enter 007 Display 007 DSS CONSOLE 2 Press NEXT Display DSS NO gt 3 Enter a console number To enter console number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example DSS 1 P 4 Enter a jack number for the console To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number 5 Press gt 6 Enter a jack number for the paired extension To change
46. 3 through 7 1f required 10 Press END Conditions The following units can be installed in the slots C 4 CO lines KX TD180 S2 2 ISDN SO lines KX TD280 S6 6 ISDN SO lines KX TD286 PR 1 PRI ISDN line KX TD290 BD 4 DID lines with Pulse DTMF KX TD185 MD 4 DID lines with MFC KX TD185 EM 4 E amp M lines KX TD184 EL 1 El line KX TD188 E El E2 8 Extension lines KX TD170 A Al A2 16 SLT lines KX TD174 There are two expansion areas in the KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One extension line unit and one outside line CO ISDN S0 DID E amp M unit can be installed There are three expansion areas in each system for the KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 from bottom to top Up to two extension line units and one outside line CO ISDN S0 E1 DID E amp M unit can be installed The KX TD188 and KX TD290 can only be installed to the KX TD1232 Master system In this case the basic and extended outside line in the Slave system cannot be used If the KX TD290 is installed to the KX TD1232 Master system the KX TD280 or KX TD286 can be installed to the Slave system only to use the ISDN extension lines An out of service system is unassignable In this case skip steps 8 and 9 for the KX TD1232 For the KX TD1232 if only the Slave system is in operation the display shows Slave in step 2 After changing the setting turn the Power Switch off and on once O
47. 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeseesseeeeeeaeecsaeceeeesaeenes 185 411 Host PBX Access Codes ci il amassed 187 ALD Pause Tine danita dedicaba 189 4131 Hash pete ry ea eee td ibid 190 AtA Disconnect Me A as De ee 192 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set ec eeeceseceneeeeeeseeeseecaecneceeeeeeneeeeeeenee 193 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment 00 eee cccceeseeceeeeceeeceeeceesaceseaeeceseeceaeeseaeceeaeeceaeeseeeeens 195 417 Outside Line Name Assignment cccccceesecesececeeeceesaeceaceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeceeaeeeeneeees 196 430 DID TIE Format Number Assignment oooooccnnocccnnncnnonnnonononnnnnnonnncnonnnonnnnccnancccncnnns 198 431 DID TIE Incoming Assignment siiri iiie iieii 199 432 DID TIE Outgoing Assignment cc cccescecceseeceeecceeaeceeaeeeeeeeeseaaeseaaeceeaeeeeeeees 201 433 DID TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit 0 0 0 ec eccccecenceeeeneeeteeceeeeeeeeeeees 203 434 DID TIE Added Number ocoononononucuuuuuuononcncnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnononononononononononononininanoninaninananns 204 435 DID TIE Wink Time Out Assignment ee eeeccceseeceenececeeeeeeeaeeenaeeceeaeeeeeeeees 205 436 Outside to TIE Transfer nasrni nrn A E aa a a iN 207 437 TIE to Outside Transfer n reaa er aaae aa aa aaaea a aanaeio hiosta 208 4381 TIE to TIE Dranster AE EET EE E E AE 209 439 TIE Security Type ici 210 440 Line Hunting SEQUENCO r mortie ii n EE E e E E dia 211 441 Voic
48. All El channels Disable Programming 1 Enter 740 Display 740 El CH ASSIGN 2 Press NEXT Display CH NO gt 3 Enter a channel number To enter a channel number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CHO1l Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another channel press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired channel number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all channels to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for channel 01 Features Guide References El Line Service 356 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 741 El Dial Mode Description Assigns a dial type to each El channel For DR2 channel only the dial sending mode can be assigned in this programme For dial receiving mode the assignment in programme 745 El DR2 Receiver is activated For the other channels the assignment in this programme is used for both the dial sending and receiving mode This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection El channel number 01 through 30 X All El channels e Signal type Pulse 10 Pulse 20 DTMF 80 DTMF 160 MFC R2 Default All El channels Pulse 10 Programming 1 Enter 741 Display 741 El DIAL MODE 2 Press NEXT Display CH NO 3 Enter a channel number To enter a channel number 01
49. Answer Time 128 257 Call Park Recall Time 145 Call Transfer to Outside Line 230 Caller ID Assignment 181 Caller ID call ring interval time 416 Caller ID Code Set 70 Caller ID Modification for Local Call 95 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Call 97 Caller ID Name Set 72 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 299 337 339 345 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 301 Characters 17 Charge Display Selection 117 Charge limitation 49 288 Charge Rate Assignment 115 Charge Rate Decimal Point Assignment 114 Charge Verification Assignment 124 Charge Verification ID Code Set 125 Circular hunting 63 412 Class of Service COS 243 331 418 CLEAR button 12 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation 299 337 339 345 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for Extension 337 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension 339 CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction 301 COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation 299 337 339 345 412 Conference button 38 Confirmation tone 15 271 406 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP 299 337 339 345 412 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 43 Cordless PT Extension Port 260 COS Class of Service 243 331 418 COS Additional Information 418 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 179 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set 193 Currency Assignment 118 D Date and Time Set 28 Day Night Service 57 58 Day Nigh
50. Assigns Host PBX access codes If the system is installed behind a host PBX an access code 1s required to make an outside call Up to four codes can be stored for an outside line group assigned to the line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X all outside line groups e Access code 1 or 2 digits four different entries max Default All outside line groups Not stored Programming 1 Enter 411 Display 411 HOST PBX S 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRGl 4 Enter an access code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new access code Display example TRG1 01 5 To enter more access codes for the same outside line group press gt and enter the access codes until all the required entries are completed Display example TRG1 01 08 10 22 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END Conditions e This programme is only required if a host PBX line is connected to the system Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign the line to an outside line group General Programming 187 2 5 Outside Line Programming e There is a maximum of fo
51. Default Code 01 Not Use Code 02 Subscriber Code 03 Not Use Code 04 Not Use Code 05 Operator Code 06 Not Use Code 07 Not Use Code 08 Collect Code 09 to Code 15 Not Use Programming 1 Enter 450 Display 450 FWD SIGN GP2 2 Press NEXT Display Code NO gt 3 Enter a code number To enter code number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Use 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another code press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired code number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 221 2 5 Outside Line Programming 451 DID Backward Group A Signal Code for MFC R2 Description Assigns a Direct Inward Dialling DID call backward group A signal code according to your central office service Selection e Code number 01 through 15 e Not Use Next Digit Complete Congestion Default Code 01 Next Digit Code 02 Not Use Code 03 Complete Code 04 Congestion Code 05 to Code 15 Not Use Programming 1 Enter 451 Display 451 FWD SIGN GPA 2 Press NEXT Display Code NO gt 3 Enter a code number To enter code number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Next Digit 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another code press NEXT or PR
52. Default All outside lines Blank Programming For Lunch 1 Enter 457 Display 457 DIL 1 1 LUN 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example C001 4 Enter a group number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number Display example Cco01 1 Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another outside line press SELECT and the desired outside line number oND Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END For Break 1 Enter 458 Display 458 DIL 1 1 BRK 224 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example C001 4 Enter a group number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number Display example C001 1 Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another outside line press SELECT and the desired outside line number o E O Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions e Ifa destination for this programming is not assigned the assignment for DIL 1 1 Day DIL 1 N performs in day mode as usual Features Guide References Day Night Service Direct In Lines DIL Ge
53. Description Sets the length of waiting time of the incoming call forward signal on the El line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time seconds 01 through 30 Default 15s Programming 1 Enter 777 Display 777 FORWARD 2 Press NEXT Display example Forward 15 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 393 4 4 El Line Programming 778 El MFC R2 Backward Timer Description Sets the length of waiting time of the outgoing call backward signal on the El line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time seconds 01 through 30 Default 15s Programming 1 Enter 778 Display 778 BACKWARD 2 Press NEXT Display example Backward 15 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 394 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 779 El MFC R2 Disappearance Timer Description Sets the length of waiting time of the stop signal on the E1 line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232
54. Description Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type for each extension group There are six Station Hunting types available Circular all of the extensions in the group are searched until an idle one is found Termination searching stops at the extension which has the largest jack number in the group Voice Mail VM all of the VM ports of an extension group are searched until an idle one is found which allows Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant AA all of the AA ports of an extension group are searched until an idle one is found which allows AA Service Ring Group all of the extensions in the ring group ring simultaneously Uniform Call Distribution UCD group members are hunted in a circular way Selection Extension group number 1 through 8 all extension groups e Disable no hunting Terminate termination Circular VM voice mail AA automated attendant RING UCD Default All extension groups Disable Programming 1 Enter 106 Display 106 STATION HUNT 2 Press NEXT Display EXT GRP NO gt 3 Enter an extension group number To enter extension group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Groupl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another extension group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired extension group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END
55. Direct Inward System Access DISA Outgoing Message OGM Timed Reminder Uniform Call Distribution UCD General Programming 141 2 3 Timer Programming 216 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time Description Sets the Message Waiting ring interval time for a single line telephone Selection Time minutes 0 through 64 O no ring Default 0 min Programming 1 Enter 216 Display 216 MW RING TIME 2 Press NEXT Display example 3 Enter the time Interval 0 min To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e When the interval time is set to 0 the telephone does not ring for Message Waiting notification e Selecting the message waiting ring type 3 quick rings or 2 normal rings in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 5 Bit 11 is available If you prefer soft ringing select 3 quick rings In this case there may be some kinds of telephones which do not ring Features Guide References Message Waiting 142 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 217 Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time Description Sets the number of seconds the Timed Reminder alarm rings Selection Time seconds 30 through 240 Default 30s Programming 1 Enter 217 Display 217 TIMED REMIND 2 Press NEXT Display example Reminder 30sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time 4
56. Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Fix 0 4 Enter the TEI To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number If you do not enter a number Automatic is automatically assigned 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e If Point is selected in programme 425 assign the fixed TEI If Multipoint is selected assign Automatic ISDN Programming 315 3 3 ISDN Line Programming e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 316 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 428 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number Description Selects whether the Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN are allocated to each terminal equipment e g ISDN telephone on the ISDN SO bus or not on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Enable Disable
57. Display with name enter hyphen after the line access number The system starts to compare the calling party s number or called party s number with the System Speed Dialling number stored after Example 9 12345678 Refer to Incoming Outside Call Information Display in the Features Guide e A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by storing it in two speed dial numbers The line access number should be stored in the first speed dial number e To access another speed dial number in step 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 e To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt lt e Programme 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set is used to name the speed dial numbers Features Guide References Call Directory System Speed Dialling General Programming 31 2 1 Manager Programming 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set Description Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in programme 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set KX T7433 KX T7436 and KX T7235 telephones can show the stored name during System Speed Dialling Selection e Speed dial number 000 through 499 Name 10 characters max Default All speed dial numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 002 Display 002 SYS SPD NAME 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 00
58. Enter 762 Display 762 E amp M SIGNAL 2 Press NEXT Display example Type 2 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 378 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 763 El E amp M Pulse Length Seizure Description Sets a pulse length when seizing an El line assigned to E amp M This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time milliseconds 150 600 Default 150 ms Programming 1 Enter 763 Display 763 SEIZURE 2 Press NEXT Display example Seizure 150msec 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 379 4 4 El Line Programming 764 El E amp M Pulse Length Answer Description Sets a pulse length when answering an El line assigned to E amp M This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time millisecond 150 600 Default 600 ms Programming 1 Enter 764 Display 764 ANSWER 2 Press NEXT Display example Answer 600msec 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the con
59. Enter the desired outside line number Press STORE u 326 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Conditions e To assign all outside lines to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 25 Features Guide References El Line Service Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 327 3 4 Extension Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 611 DDI Number Extension Number Conversion Description Used to convert a Direct Dialling In DDI number to an extension number in order to place an incoming DDI call at a specific extension Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part DDI Number 6 digits max Default All jacks Not stored Programming 1 Enter 611 Display 611 EXT DDI 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 4 Enter a DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of 128 DDI numbers Each DDI number can be a maximum of six digits
60. Extension group number 1 through 8 Default All jacks 1 2 Extension group 1 Programming 1 Enter 602 Display 602 EXT GROUP 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 EXG1 4 Enter the extension group number To change the current entry enter the new extension group number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of eight extension groups Each extension can only belong to one group e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available General Programming 245 2 7 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e To assign all jacks to one extension group press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Features Guide References Call Pickup Extension Group Paging Station Hunting 246 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Description The Direct In Lines DIL 1 N feature can be assigned to ring more than one e
61. KX TD194 must belong to the same system as the data port assigned in programme 130 For example if the assigned data port is one of the extension jacks in the master system the KX TD194 must be connected to jacks 01 through 32 On the other hand if the assigned data port is one of the extension jacks in the slave system the KX TD194 must be connected to jacks 33 through 64 Programming example for the KX TD1232 Unit 1 Data port jack 02 MW port 1 single line telephone jack 01 2 MW port 3 single line telephone jack 05 2 Unit 4 Data port jack 33 MW port 2 single line telephone jack 34 2 MW port 6 single line telephone jack 35 1 e A single line telephone jack cannot be assigned to more than one unit Features Guide References Message Waiting General Programming 105 2 2 System Programming 134 Hotel Application Description Assigns whether the hotel application is enabled or disabled Selection ON OFF Default OFF Programming 1 Enter 134 Display 134 HOTEL ON OFF 2 Press NEXT Display example Hotel OFF 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions If ON is selected the Hotel menu is displayed on the operator extension s KX T7436 or KX T7235 and the Room Status feature is available Features Guide References Hotel Application Room Status 106 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 135
62. MFC This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Busy Reorder Busy Reorder Default Busy Reorder Programming 1 Enter 785 Display 785 El TONE TYPE 2 Press NEXT Display example Busy Reorder 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions None Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 401 4 4 El Line Programming 402 El Programming Section 5 Optional Programming Optional Programming 403 5 1 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming 990 System Additional Information Description Allows the following programming items to be changed if required Each bit in each Area represents a programming item Chart for the Areas and Bits Bit Number jua N pul u p A Oe pul N ua pa 10 9 8 pul Display Example Area 01 Area 02 Area 03 Area 04 Area 05 Area 06 Area 07 Area 08 Area 09 Area 10 PIP PIBIPIRIPlOolRio FIFIRIPIEIRIBlolBio PIP PIPIPIRIPloOlBIR PIF PIB ol R Flololo FIPFIE Plo RiP olo B RHlelR p p RlpPio plO FIP PIBIPI RIP ololo PIP PIPIPIRIPlololo tlelelelelelololol lele pr pelolo p ir tIerlelelelelololerlols Iele lelelelolololols RHlelR p pr plojolp lo RHle R p pr pRlojo pR oO Ielelelelelolololol RHleje
63. NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a DID DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To assign no number press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of 200 DID DDI numbers Each DID DDI number can be one through 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and X wild card e Ifthe same DID DDI number is assigned to different locations only the number at the lowest location number becomes available The others are disregarded 108 General Programming 2 2 System Programming e To use this programme for DID numbers Transfer Table must be selected beforehand in programme 135 DID Number Conversion Selection e To use this programme for DDI numbers Use must be selected beforehand in programme 154 DID Transfer Table for DDI Call Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDD Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 109 2 2 System Programming 137 138 DID DDI Extension Day Night Description Determines the extension which receive a Direct Inward Dialling DID or Direct Dialling In DDD call in both the day and night modes Selection e Location number
64. PBX if connected If Internal is selected your system supplies the internal clock to the other PBX Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 349 4 4 El Line Programming 720 E1 TIE Ringing Service Description Sets a call receiving type for the El channels assigned to TIE If DIL is selected DIL 1 1 or DIL 1 N will perform This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Outside CO line number 25 through 54 X all outside lines from 25 to 54 e Type TIE DIL Default All outside lines TIE Programming 1 Enter 720 Display 720 TIE RING 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter an outside line number 25 you can also press NEXT Display example CO Line NO 25 4 Press NEXT Display example CO25 TIE 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END Conditions If TIE is selected for the E1 channels assigned to DR2 then not the DID but the DIL 1 1 or DIL 1 N will perform Features Guide References El Line Service TIE Line Service 350 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 721 PRI El Reference CO Description Assigns which outside line number system data each PRI line or El line uses Afte
65. Press NEXT Display DIMF TX 03 Ge Enter a level 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 385 4 4 El Line Programming 770 El DSP Gain DTMF Receive Description Assigns a DTMF receiving level on DSP on the El line This program is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Level 01 through 32 Default 16 Programming 1 Enter 770 Display 770 DTMF RX DSP 2 Press NEXT Display DTMF RX 16 Ge Enter a level Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 386 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 771 El DSP Gain MFC R2 Transmit Description Assigns a MFC R2 transmitting level from DSP on the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Level 01 through 32 Default 16 Programming 1 Enter 771 Display 771 MFC TX DSP 2 Press NEXT Display MFC TX 16 Ge Enter a level 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 387 4 4 El Line Programming 772 El DSP Gain MFC R2 Receive Description Assigns a MFC R2 receiving level on DSP on the El line This programm
66. Programming Features Guide References None 292 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming 112 ISDN Network Type Assignment Description Assigns the type of ISDN network Selection ISDN network mode 000 through 255 Default KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK Mode 39 Others Mode 51 Programming 1 Enter 112 Display 112 SWITCH TYPE 2 Press NEXT Display example Mode 51 3 Enter an ISDN network mode To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new network mode 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions None Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 293 3 2 System Programming 140 DDI Number Phantom Extension Number Conversion Description Used to convert a Direct Dialling In DDI number to a phantom extension number in order to send an incoming DDI call to a specific extension Selection e Location number 000 through 128 DDI number 1 through 6 digits Blank no number Default All locations Blank Programming 1 Enter 140 Display 140 PHANTOM DDI 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 4 Enter a DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To assign no number press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT
67. Programming 1 Enter 116 Display 116 ROM VERSION 2 Press NEXT Display System NO 3 Enter the system number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system 4 To confirm the other system press SELECT and enter the system number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system 5 Press END Conditions e The out of service system number is unacceptable e For KX TD816 you can enter the system number 0 only Skip step 4 Features Guide References None 78 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 117 Voice Mail Number Assignment Description Assigns the jack number corresponding to the voice mail port for data transmission to the Voice Processing System The voice mail port is expandable to six ports 12 ports during System Connection for KX TD1232 This programme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 Selection KX TD816 e Jack number 02 through 16 KX TD1232 e Mast Master Slav Slave e Jack number 02 through 32 Master 33 through 64 Slave Default All jacks Blank Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 117 Display 117 VMS PORT ASN 2 Press NEXT Display example Mastl 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Press m to ente
68. T303 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 20 T304 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 21 T305 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 22 T306 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 23 T310 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 24 T3D3 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 25 T3D9 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 Default 1 ADPCM Type KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK M Law Others A Law 2 Status Message Send ISDN Programming 293 3 2 System Programming 3 Status Receiving Mode Disc 4 Numbering Type 0 Unknown 5 Numbering Plan 1 ISDN Telephone Numbering Plan 6 T200 Extension Timer 1 0 s 7 T203 Extension Timer 10 0 s 8 T302 Extension Timer 15 0 s 9 T303 Extension Timer 4 0 s 10 T304 Extension Timer 20 0 s 11 T305 Extension Timer 30 0 s 12 T306 Extension Timer 30 0 s 13 T310 Extension Timer 40 0 s 14 T3D3 Extension Timer 30 0 s 15 T3D9 Extension Timer 20 0 s 16 T200 CO Timer 1 0 s 17 T203 CO Timer 10 0 s 18 T302 CO Timer 15 0 s 19 T303 CO Timer 4 0 s 20 T304 CO Timer 30 0 s 21 T305 CO Timer 30 0 s 22 T306 CO Timer 0 0 s 23 T310 CO Timer 100 0 s 24 T3D3 CO Timer 60 0 s 25 T3D9 CO Timer 20 0 s Programming 1 Enter 149 Display 149 ISDN DATA 2 Press NEXT repeatedly until the desired item is displayed Display example ADPCM TYPE A Law 3 For Data 1 through 3 keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is d
69. TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Programme 418 Outside Line Number Assignment for ISDN El is used to store the subscriber s number of your system that is informed to the called party ISDN Programming 301 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 302 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 420 ISDN Ring Service Assignment Description Assigns the ISDN ring service type for each outside line ISDN A call is received using the Direct Dialling In DDI or Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN ringing service which is assigned in programme 425 ISDN Configuration Regular A call is received using Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 or 1 N which are assigned in programmes 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night and 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e ISDN Regular Default All outside lines Regular Programming 1 Enter 420 Display 420 ISDN RING 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01
70. TIE line on an outside line group basis This restriction applies to the following 1 A TIE call through another PBX 2 Call Forwarding to a TIE line 3 Call Transfer to a TIE line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X all outside line groups Enable Disable Default All outside line groups Enable Programming 1 Enter 438 Display 438 TIE TIE XFER 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References TIE Line Service General Programming 209 2 5 Outside Line Programming 439 TIE Security Type Description Assigns the security mode for TIE calls There are two modes Non Security and Trunk Security Outside line security Non Security mode allows the caller to access an outside line without dialling a TIE user code Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE User Code assigned in programme 017
71. To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e The eXtra Device Port feature must be assigned Disable for console ports e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available General Programming 241 2 7 Extension Programming e To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Immediately after changing your assignment the changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds Features Guide References EXtra Device Port XDP 242 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 601 Class of Service Description Programmes each extension for Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities of each extension Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 X KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e COS number 1 through 8 Default All jacks 1 2 COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 601 Display 601 COS 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 COS1 COS1 4 Enter a COS number To change
72. Values 423 Programme Default 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set KX TD816 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 VM 09 181 VM 10 182 VM 11 183 VM 12 184 KX TD1232 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 VM 09 181 VM 10 182 VM 11 183 VM 12 184 VM 13 171 VM 14 172 VM 15 173 VM 16 174 VM 17 175 VM 18 176 VM 19 179 VM 20 180 VM 21 185 VM 22 186 VM 23 187 VM 24 188 119 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment All voice mail numbers EXG 1 120 User Password 1234 121 Walking COS Password 1234 122 UCD Overflow All UCD groups Not stored 123 UCD Time Table All time tables Not stored 124 Phantom Extension Number Set All locations Not stored 125 Area Code Assignment All locations Blank 126 Caller ID Modification for Local Call All locations Deleted number 0 Added number Blank 127 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Deleted digits 0 Added number Blank Call 128 PBX Code Not stored 129 E amp M Signal Assignment Continuous 130 Message Waiting Control All units Not stored 131 Message Waiting Lamp Assignment 1 132 Message Waiting Port Set All units All message waiting ports Not stored 134 Hotel Application OFF 135 DID Number Conversion Selection EXT Nu
73. address 409 for day or 410 for night Display example 409 INTERCEP DAY 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter the outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 e Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group e Assignable extension numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 003 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers 012 ISDN Extension Number Set General Programming 185 2 5 Outside Line Programming Voice Mail extension numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom extension numbers 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers 813 Floating Number Assignment Features Guide References Intercept Routing 186 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 411 Host PBX Access Codes Description
74. and enter the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another parameter press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired parameter number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 399 4 4 El Line Programming 784 El Group C Description Assigns a signal code for Group C parameters on the El line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Parameter number 01 Group C ANI N 1 02 Group II ANI e Signal code 00 through 15 00 Undefined Default All Parameters 00 Programming 1 Enter 784 Display 784 GROUP C 2 Press NEXT Display Parameter NO gt 3 Enter a parameter number To enter a parameter number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 00 4 Enter the signal code To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another parameter press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired parameter number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 400 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 785 E1 Tone Type for Making Calls Description Sets a tone type for busy or reorder mode when making a call using the El line assigned to DR2
75. and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each DDI number can be one through six digits consisting of 0 through 9 Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDI 294 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming 149 ISDN Data Assignment Description Assigns the following ISDN data Selection 1 ADPCM Type A Law M Law 2 Status Message Send Stop 3 Status Receiving Mode Disc disconnect Ignr ignore 4 Number Type 0 Unknown 1 International Number 2 National Number 3 Network Specific Number 4 Subscriber Number 5 Numbering Plan 0 Unknown 1 ISDN Telephone Numbering Plan 8 National Standard Numbering Plan 9 Private Numbering Plan 6 T200 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 7 T203 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 8 T302 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 9 T303 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 10 T304 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 11 T305 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 12 T306 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 13 T310 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 14 T3D3 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 15 T3D9 Extension Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 16 T200 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 17 T203 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 18 T302 CO Timer seconds 0 0 through 255 0 19
76. cece ceeceeeeeseeeseeeseecseecaeceseceseeeaeesaeesaeenseeees 395 780 EL GTrO0p Lian danna 396 St Group TL ita sete tentacstandovessdeleesdiccectecsteestiasdesesoddeeerasoacessadeerst save 397 782 EEL Groupe Ars titi dd aaa dd 398 783 EL Group B iii n 399 784 EL CrOUp C iena Rade Rages dedi ta tag E a dae et a et ra 400 785 El Tone Type for Making CallS oonoonnnnnnnccnncnnnccnncnnnccnoncnanccnnncnn ccoo nono n crono cnnccnnccnnos 401 5 Optional Programming sscccsssssssccccsssssssssccsssssssssscssssssess 403 5 1 Optional Programming sveceecscccecsscsices scscecsscsdcecssscensesecceueovanectesasdeue saasecvasssetonsscensessesee 404 990 System Additional Information 2 0 0 0 ccc ccscceessceceececeseeetaeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeceeaeeeeaeeeeaees 404 991 COS Additional Informati n neesenca a a a AEA A E A 418 6 Default Vales ici iia aol E O AA E Or Table of Contents Section 1 Programming Instructions Programming Instructions 9 1 1 Programming Instructions 1 1 Programming Instructions Default Setting This system has a default factory setting If any of the programming needs to be changed you will find the necessary information in the Features Guide This makes the system very simple to install and customise as required by the customer Any required changes can be written in Programming Tables Required Telephone Set One of the following telephone sets is required for System Programmin
77. delete the current entry press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another floating station press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of 128 DDI numbers Each DDI number can be a maximum of six digits consisting of 0 through 9 e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To use this programme DDI conversion number must be selected in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 bit 13 ISDN Programming 335 3 4 Extension Programming Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDD 336 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 617 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for Extension Description Selects the type of additional number for the CLIP and COLP information when making and answering a call through an ISDN line You can select the type from one of the following DDI Subscriber number DDI number None Subscriber number Optional number Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Types DDI Any number 6 digits max Default All jacks DDI Programming 1 Enter 617 Display 617 CLIP COLP 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press N
78. displayed Press STORE 7 Press END N Conditions e Select the standard used by your modem e This assignment is effective for both the Master and Slave systems Features Guide References System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 282 General Programming Section 3 ISDN Programming ISDN Programming 283 3 1 Manager Programming 3 1 Manager Programming 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Description Assigns an extension number to each port which is connected to the ISDN SO unit Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 Extension Number 2 or 3 digits Default All ports Not stored Programming 1 Enter 012 Display 012 ISDN EXT 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display 01 Not Stored 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each extension number can be two or three digits consisting of 0 through 9 The X and keys cannot be used e A multiple subscribers number MSN is determined regarding of this assignment The MSN consists of the assigned extension number and an additional digit 0 through 9 lt Example
79. een eed 118 148 Off Hook Mont i 119 150 Lunch Service Starting Ending Time ec cesecesseeseeceeeseeeseceeeeeaeeeseeeneeeeaes 120 151 Break Service Starting Ending Time eee ceeecsceeseeceseeseeceseceeeeeseeeseeeeneeeaes 122 152 Charge Verification Assignment 0 0 00 cccccesceesseceeseceesceceeeeeceaeeesaeceeaeceeaaeceaeeeneeeeaas 124 153 Charge Verification ID Code Set oo cece ceececesccesseceeeeeeaeeceeeeceeeeeaeeeeaaeceaaeceeeeeee 125 2 3 A reir nne iNe io aE RRASA EN EAEE EEEE N aR Ea S 126 BOON Hold Recall Time ici ii a iii 126 201 TransterRecall Mime a id 127 202 Call Forwarding No Answer TlM8 ooooonocccnoccconoccconnnonnnncnonocononccnnnnn cnn no conan ccnnncnnnnss 128 203 Intercept Time ici A ning idad 129 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time eee ce marensin aaea ee aast 130 205 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration TlM coonnononnnnnnccononononanonononocannncnnnnnonono 131 206 Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time ccccnnnncnunonnnnnononnnnnnnnnnonocnnananonononccnnno 132 207 Furst Digit Times cian aenn n a a Rapto 133 BOS mter Digit TMe tiranos a aa aeaa kaoni 134 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times ooooonncccnoncccnonacononcnoncnononnnnnnononnn cono no cnn nacnnnccnnncaninos 135 210 Automatic Redial Interval TlM oononnoncnnnnncnnnononnonnnononoconannnonononononanana cnn ncononnana no nnnos 136 PEH Dial Start Timeen Susie it A ale ras 137 212 Call Duration Co
80. extensions when a 0 send 1 TIE Line Service TIE line access code is dialled 1 not send 4 16 Reserved Optional Programming 415 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 09 1 Determines the ring interval time for 0 short 1 Caller ID incoming calls with Caller ID 1 normal 2 Reserved 4 3 Selects the LED flashing pattern of the 11 Red Flashing 11 e Call FWD DND button which indicates the Red On Forwarding activating feature Call Forwarding Do 10 Red On Red DND Not Disturb On Reset the system to function this 01 Red On Red assignment Flashing 00 Red Flashing Red Flashing 5 8 Reserved 9 Allows the calling party s number and 0 remains the 1 Caller ID name to remain on the display of the current display call 1 Call duration 10 11 Reserved 12 Permits or disallows the last extension in 0 permit 1 Log in Log out a group to log out 1 disallow 13 15 Reserved 16 Determines what should be done with 0 disconnect in 15 1 Budget the call after emitting an alarm because secon Management the Budget Management limit was 1 do not reached disconnect 10 1 8 Sends a dial tone to the extension when 0 send 1 El Line a CO button is pressed or the line access 1 not send Automatic or Outside Line Group code is entered to access the El line
81. for the KX TD1232 only Selection A bit B bit Default A bit Programming 1 Enter 760 Display 760 DIAL BIT 2 Press NEXT Display example Dial Bit A bit 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 376 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 761 El Bit Position for Clear Back Description Sets a bit position for clear back on the El line assigned to DR2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection A bit B bit AB bit Default A bit Programming 1 Enter 761 Display 761 CLEAR BIT 2 Press NEXT Display example Clear Bit A bit 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 377 4 4 El Line Programming 762 El E amp M Signalling Type Description Sets an E amp M signalling type for the El line Type 1 A bit control default setting 0 Type 2 A bit control default setting 1 Type 3 B bit control default setting 0 Type 4 B bit control default setting 1 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Default Type 2 Programming 1
82. ignore the user dialled x and If your CO is such a type select 0 no check 0 no check 1 check Toll Restriction Reserved Allows you to remove confirmation tone 0 3 This tone is sent when a conversation is established just after dialling the feature number for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve disable 1 enable Confirmation Tone An outside line set to pulse or call blocking mode in programme 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 0 60 1 67 0 for HK 1 for Others Dial Type Selection 406 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 02 8 Determines whether an extension 0 extension 0 Voice Mail mailbox number is substituted by the number Integration for extension number or it is programmable 1 free Inband free If a call is forwarded or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in programme 609 Voice Mail Access Codes 9 Determines the initial display of a 0 names 0 Call D
83. installed in the slots C 4 CO lines KX TD180 S2 2 ISDN SO lines KX TD280 S6 6 ISDN SO lines KX TD286 PR 1 PRI ISDN line KX TD290 BD 4 DID lines with Pulse DTMF KX TD185 MD 4 DID lines with MFC KX TD185 EM 4 E amp M lines KX TD184 EL 1 El line KX TD188 E El E2 8 Extension lines KX TD170 A Al A2 16 SLT lines KX TD174 e There are two expansion areas in the KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One extension line unit and one outside line CO ISDN SO DID E amp M unit can be installed e There are three expansion areas in each system for the KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 from bottom to top Up to two extension line units and one outside line CO ISDN S0 E1 DID E amp M unit can be installed The KX TD188 and KX TD290 can only be installed to the KX TD1232 Master system In this case the basic and extended outside line in the Slave system cannot be used e Ifthe KX TD290 is installed to the KX TD1232 Master system the KX TD280 or KX TD286 can be installed to the Slave system only to use the ISDN extension lines e An out of service system is unassignable In this case skip steps 8 and 9 for the KX TD1232 e For the KX TD1232 if only the Slave system is in operation the display shows Slave in step 2 e After changing the setting turn the Power Switch off and on once Otherwise the previous setting will remain ISDN Programming 291 3 2 System
84. line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available 196 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming e Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 or KX TD188 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Display Message Incoming Outside Call Information Display General Programming 197 2 5 Outside Line Programming 430 DID TIE Format Number Assignment Description Assigns a Direct Inward Dialling DID and TIE format number to each outside line group Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X X all outside line groups e DID TIE format number 1 through 8 Default All outside line groups Not stored Programming 1 Enter 4
85. no number Default All ports Disable Programming 1 Enter 428 Display 428 MSN SERVICE 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave 1f available e To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e You must assign on extension number to the ISDN terminal beforehand For details refer to your terminal s manual ISDN Programming 317 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service 318 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 429 ISDN Extension Progress Tone Description Enables or disables to send the progress tone to ISDN extension on ISDN port basis Selection Default Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports Enable Disable no tone All ports Disable Programming 1 Enter 429 Display 429 ISDN TONE Press NEXT Display Port NO gt Ent
86. number 1 through 8 X all COS e Enable Disable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 510 Display 510 NITE SERVICE 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e The operator extension can switch the mode regardless of setting Features Guide References Day Night Service 238 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 511 PT Programming Level Description Determines the Station Programming level on a Class of Service COS basis There are two levels as follows Level 1 enables all Station Programming Level 2 disables CO button programming in Station Programming Selection e COS number 1 through 8 X all COS e LVL1 LVL2 Default All COS LVL1 Programming 1 Enter 511 Display 511 PITS PGM LVL 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 LVL1 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed
87. outside line group number 1 Features Guide References TIE Line Service General Programming 207 2 5 Outside Line Programming 437 TIE to Outside Transfer Description Enables or disables transferring TIE calls to an outside line on an outside line group basis This restriction applies to the following 1 An outside call through another PBX 2 Call Forwarding to an outside line 3 Call Transfer to an outside line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X X all outside line groups Enable Disable Default All outside line groups Disable Programming 1 Enter 437 Display 437 TIE CO XFER 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References TIE Line Service 208 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 438 TIE to TIE Transfer Description Enables or disables transferring TIE calls to a
88. p r elojolo rP 404 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 01 1 Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 e Call Transfer 1 Music on Hold e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly and then placing down the Hold Hold handset during an outside call single 1 disconnection line telephones only 3 Result of pressing the FLASH button on 0 disconnection 0 External proprietary telephones during an signal Feature Access outside call External Feature Access is 1 External Feature e Flash effective only during a call via an Access analogue outside line 4 7 Reserved 8 Enables or disables the dial tone 0 disable 1 None between obtaining an outside line and 1 enable dialling the phone number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 9 Result of pressing the hookswitch 0 Consultation 0 Consultation lightly single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 10 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail sent to the VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration for Inband 12 11 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a 01 1 0s Integration for mailbox number to the VPS after the 10 1 5s Inband VPS answers a call 11 2 0s
89. select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a mailbox number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave 1f available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable General Programming 253 2 7 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant ports e Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and PAUSE e To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the display press gt gt or lt Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Inband 254 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 610 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment Description Assigns whether to close the mailbox or keep recording the conversation after a call is intercepted This progr
90. setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 390 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 775 El ANI Service Mode Description Sets the Automatic Number Identification ANI mode for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection None Incoming Only Outgoing Only Both Calls Default None Programming 1 Enter 775 Display 775 ANI MODE 2 Press NEXT Display example None 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 391 4 4 El Line Programming 776 El ANI Maximum Digits Description Assigns the maximum digits for Automatic Number Identification ANI number This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Number of digits 00 through 16 00 no ANI number Default 00 Programming 1 Enter 776 Display 776 ANI MAX 2 Press NEXT Display example ANI Max 00 3 Enter the number of digits To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of digits Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 392 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 777 El MFC R2 Forward Timer
91. the KX TD290 or KX TD188 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 e To assign all outside lines to one outside line group press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Outside Line Group 172 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection Description Each outside line can be programmed for DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency pulse rotary or call blocking This programme assigns your choice to each line DTMF The dialling signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to tone signals and transmitted to the outside line Pulse The dialling signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to pulse signals and transmitted to the outside line Call blocking If your central office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but you are contracted for pulse select this mode When dialling on the line with a touch tone telephone only the pulse signals are sent to the outside line Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e DTMF Pulse C Block call blocking Default KX TD816BX KX TD1232 D BX ML KX TDN 1232 All outside lines Pulse KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK X All outside lines DTMF Programming 1 Enter 402 Display 402 DIAL MODE 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt
92. to the original caller Selection Number of rings 0 through 48 0 Transfer Recall disabled Default 12 rings Programming 1 Enter 201 Display 201 TRAN RECALL 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e You cannot leave the entry empty e Operator 1 can also be the Transfer Recall destination which can be assigned in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 Bit 1 Features Guide References Call Transfer General Programming 127 2 3 Timer Programming 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Description Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding No Answer feature If a call is not answered after the programmed number of rings the call is forwarded to the destination Selection Number of rings 1 through 12 Default 3 rings Programming 1 Enter 202 Display 202 CALL FWD NA 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 3 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e This timer is also used for Intercept Routing If an incoming DISA Direct Inward System Access call to the Intercept Routing destination is not answer
93. 0 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Speed dial numbers are programmed in programme 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set e To go to another speed dial number in step 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 32 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Call Directory System Speed Dialling General Programming 33 2 1 Manager Programming 003 Extension Number Set Description Assigns an extension number to each extension Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part Extension Number 2 through 4 digits Default KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 101 through 116 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 201 through 216 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 101 through 164 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 201 through 264 Programming 1 Enter 003 Display 003 EXT NUMBER 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jac
94. 01 02 1 165 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another voice mail number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired voice mail number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END General Programming 81 2 2 System Programming Conditions For the KX TD 1232 VM 01 through VM 12 are for the Master System and VM 13 through VM 24 are for the Slave System 1f available You cannot leave an entry empty The first one or two digits of the voice mail extension numbers are subject to programme 100 Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks The display shows VM XX Y Y 1 ZZZ in step 3 XX means the voice mail number YY means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in 117 Voice Mail Number Assignment 1 of YY 1 means the first part of the jack number in digital line Y Y 2 means the second number of the jack number in digital line Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 12
95. 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of 32 names for KX TD816 and 128 names for KX TD1232 Each name has a maximum of 10 characters 36 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave 1f available For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods Features Guide References Call Directory Display Message Intercom Calling General Programming 37 2 1 Manager Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary telephones from a centralised telephone Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO KX TD816 01 through 08 Outside line number KX TD1232 01 through 54 Outside line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch Dialling 16 digits max Tele
96. 04 Display 804 EXTERNAL BGM 2 Press NEXT Display Pager NO 3 Enter an external pager number To enter pager number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Pagerl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another pager press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired external pager number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD816 please skip steps 6 and 7 e The external pager is a user supplied item One external pager can be installed for KX TD816 and two external pagers can be installed for KX TD1232 e For the KX TD1232 external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e Programme 803 Music Source Use is used to select the music source to be used for BGM General Programming 269 2 8 Resource Programming Features Guide References Background Music BGM 270 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone Description Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers The default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers before paging is broadcast This programming applies to all the external pagers Selection On Off Default On Programming 1 Enter 805 Display 805 EX PAGE TONE 2 Press NEXT Display example Tone On 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired
97. 1 Enter 753 Display 753 DGT PAUSE 2 Press NEXT Display example Pause 830msec 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 369 4 4 El Line Programming 754 El Flash Detection Description Sets a flash detection time for the El line assigned to E amp M C This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time milliseconds 208 1016 80 1016 208 1544 80 1544 Disable Default 208 1016 Programming 1 Enter 754 Display 754 FLASH TIME 2 Press NEXT Display example Flash 208 1016 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 370 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 755 El Answer Decision Timer Description Sets an answering detection time for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time 001 through 255 X 32 milliseconds is the actual time Default 001 Programming 1 Enter 755 Display 755 ANSWER TIME 2 Press NEXT Display example Answer 001 3 Enter a number for an answering detection time To enter number 001 you can also press NEXT 4 Pr
98. 1 Enter a programme address 322 through 329 Display example 322 ARS ROUTE 1 2 Press NEXT to programme time schedule A To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed Display example A G M GM GM 3 Enter an outside line group number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new number 4 Press gt to enter the paired modification table number 5 Enter a modification table number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new modification table number 6 Press m to enter the next priority outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to enter other outside line group numbers and modification table numbers 8 Press STORE 9 To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 158 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 11 Press END Conditions e Up to three outside line groups and modification plans can be assigned for each time schedule The outside line group number and modification table number must be entered together The highest priority outside line group number and modification table number is entered first left to right e Programmes 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit and 331 ARS Modify Added Number are used to make up the eight Modification Tables Fe
99. 14 13 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0 5 Integration for 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 10 15s Inband extension i 11 2 0s 15 Assigns whether the system or the VPS 0 system 0 e Message turns off the Message Waiting lamp 1 VPS Waiting when the user hears a message recorded Voice Mail in a mailbox Integration for Inband 16 Reserved Optional Programming 405 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 02 If an outside party is transferred and unanswered assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer initiating extension or at Operator 1 0 initiating extension 1 Operator 1 Call Transfer If the restriction of outside call duration is enabled in programme 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit assigns if the restriction is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only 0 both calls outgoing calls only pul None Allows you to remove confirmation tone 4 By default a beep tone sounds when a three party conference is started ended 0 disable 1 enable Confirmation Tone Determines if the dialled X and will be checked by Toll Restriction This assignment is required for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some COs
100. 2 01 through 12 X all ports e Permanent Call Default KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call Other ports Permanent KX TD1232 All ports Permanent Programming 1 Enter 424 Display 424 LAYER1 MODE 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Permanent 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective ISDN Programming 309 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 310 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 425 ISDN Configuration Description Assigns the configuration on an ISDN port basis This programme is available for ISDN extensions only Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports e Point point to point Multipoint point to multipoint Default
101. 2 D BX ML KX TDN1232 60s KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK 900 s 15 min KX TD1232X 30 s 211 Dial Start Time KX TD816BX KX TD1232 D BX ML X KX TDN1232 500 ms KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK 1000 ms 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Os 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time 1 ring 214 DISA Prolong Time 3 min 215 Outgoing Message Time 32 0 32 0 for OGM 1 through 4 from left to right 216 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 0 min 217 Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time 30 s 218 DISA AA Wait Time ls 219 Call Park Recall Time 12 rings 220 TIE First Inter Digit Time 5s 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialling Disable 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 All locations Not stored through 6 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels All locations Not stored 2 through 6 311 Special Carrier Access Codes All locations Not stored 312 ARS Mode Off 313 ARS Time All days of the week A 8 00 AM B 5 00 PM C 9 00 PM D Disable 426 Default Values Programme Default 314 321 through 8 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 All locations Not stored 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 All time schedules Not stored 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit All modification tables O 331 ARS Modify Added Number All modification tables Not stored 332 Extra Entry Table S
102. 24 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 153 Charge Verification ID Code Set Description Assigns an ID code required to refer the charge information Selection 4 digits 0000 through 9999 Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 153 Display 153 CHARGE ID 2 Press NEXT Display example Code 1234 3 Enter an ID code To delete the current entry press CLEAR 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions None Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference General Programming 125 2 3 Timer Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Description Assigns the length of the hold recall timer This timer is used to alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period of time Selection Time seconds 0 through 240 0 Hold Recall disabled Default 60 s Programming 1 Enter 200 Display 200 HOLD RECALL 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 60 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e Select 0 if Hold Recall is not required e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Call Hold 126 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time Description Sets the number of rings before transfer recall occurs If a transferred call is not answered after the programmed number of rings the call returns
103. 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Pulse 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 General Programming 173 2 5 Outside Line Programming 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave 1f available e To assign all lines to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 If DTMF is assigned set the DTMF time of the line in programme 404 DTMF Time e If pulse or call blocking is assigned set the pulse speed of the line in programme 403 Pulse Speed Selection and set the pulse break ratio and inter digit pause in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 7 and bits 12 and 11 if necessary Features Guide References Dial Type Selection 174 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 403 Pulse Speed Selection Description An outside line set for pulse or call blocking mode in programme 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two pulse rates 10 pps low and 20 pps high This programme sets the pulse speed for each outside line set to pulse or call blocking mode
104. 30 Display 430 MODIFY FORM 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Not Stored 4 Enter a DID TIE format number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions This is the first and basic programming for the DID TIE feature If this assignment is changed it will affect other programming 431 through 435 Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID El Line Service TIE Line Service 198 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 431 DID TIE Incoming Assignment Description Assigns a DID TIE incoming method immediate or wink to each DID TIE format according to your central office service Immediate Incoming DID and TIE calls can be received right after the receiving signal arrives Wink Incoming DID and TIE calls can be received after the wink signal is transmitted to the central office after the receiving signal arrives Selection DID TIE format number 1 through 8 X all DID TIE formats e Immediate Wink Default All DID TIE formats Wink Programming 1 Enter 431 Display 431 SIGNAL IN 2 Press NEXT Display Form
105. 4 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 198 291 through 294 296 through 299 Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 82 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 119 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment Description Assigns each voice mail number to a voice mail extension group number This programme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 Selection e Voice mail number VM KX TD816 01 through 12 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all voice mail numbers e Voice mail extension group number EXG 1 through 8 Default All voice mail numbers EXG 1 Programming 1 Enter 119 Display 119 VM EXT GROUP 2 Press NEXT Display VM NO gt 3 Enter a voice mail number To enter voice mail number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example VM 01 402 1 EXG1 4 Enter the voice mail extension group number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another voice mail number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired voice mail number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For t
106. 6 02 through 16 KX TD1232 02 through 64 All units Not stored Programming 1 Enter 130 Display 130 MW CONTROL 2 Press NEXT Display MW UNIT NO gt 3 Enter a unit number Enter a jack number To enter unit number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Unit 1 Jack Display example Unit 1 Jack 05 Press STORE To programme another unit press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired unit number Repeat steps 4 and 6 Press END Conditions The following jacks are not available for this assignment Jack 01 The jack for the manager extension Jacks assigned to voice mail ports 100 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Jacks assigned to consoles and paired telephones Jacks already assigned to the message waiting adaptor unit If the unit is connected to a port which is not assigned as the data port a clicking sound may be heard from the unit Please make sure that the unit is connected to the assigned port e When the data port is assigned properly and the unit is connected to the assigned port the unit power indicator lights red If the assignment and connection are wrong the power indicator will flash e For the KX TD1232 unit numbers 1 through 3 are for the Master System and 4 through 6 are for the Slave System Jack numbers 02 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave System e After this assignment the message waitin
107. 785 El Tone Type for Making Calls Busy Reorder 5 Optional Programming Programme Default 990 System Additional Information See Default shown in the explanation table 991 COS Additional Information Bits 4 3 2 and 1 All COS 0000 Bit 5 All COS 1 436 Default Values Section 6 Index Index 437 A AA hunting 63 AA Service 75 Absent Messages 45 Account button 38 Account code 31 61 Account Code Entry 61 Account Code Entry Mode 235 Adjust Time 77 Alarm tone 15 ANI Automatic Number Identification 347 391 392 Another Extension Message Waiting button 38 Area Code Assignment 93 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 156 ARS Mode 153 ARS Modify Added Number 161 ARS Modify Removed Digit 160 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 158 ARS Time 154 Automated Attendant AA Service 75 Automatic Access Outside Line Group Assignment 60 Automatic Hold by CO DSS Button 66 Automatic Line Access 60 Automatic Number Identification AND 347 391 392 Automatic Redial Interval Time 136 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 135 B Background Music BGM 267 269 BGM Background Music 267 269 Break Service Starting Ending Time 122 Budget Management 49 416 Budget Management for ISDN Extension 288 C Call blocking mode 173 175 Call Duration Count Start Time 138 Call Forwarding to Outside Line 231 Call Forwarding Follow Me 418 Call Forwarding No
108. All DID formats 15 s 447 DID Disappearance Timer for MFC R2 All DID formats 24 s 448 DID First Dial Start Time for MFC R2 All DID formats 2 449 DID Forward Group I Signal Code for Code 01 Dial 1 Code 02 Dial 2 Code 03 Dial 3 MFC R2 Code 04 Dial 4 Code 05 Dial 5 Code 06 Dial 6 Code 07 Dial 7 Code 08 Dial 8 Code 09 Dial 9 Code 10 Dial 0 Code 11 to Code 15 Not Use 450 DID Forward Group II Signal Code for Code 01 Not Use Code 02 Subscriber Code MFC R2 03 Not Use Code 04 Not Use Code 05 Operator Code 06 Not Use Code 07 Not Use Code 08 Collect Code 09 to Code 15 Not Use 451 DID Backward Group A Signal Code for Code 01 Next Digit Code 02 Not Use Code MFC R2 03 Complete Code 04 Congestion Code 05 to Code 15 Not Use 452 DID Backward Group B Signal Code for Code 01 Idle Code 02 Not Use Code 03 Busy MFC R2 Code 04 Congestion Code 05 Unallocation Code 6 to Code 15 Not Use 457 458 DIL 1 1 Lunch Break Group All outside lines Blank 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night COS 1 through 7 Level 1 Day Night COS 8 Level 7 Day Night 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration All COS Disable Limit 503 Call Transfer to Outside Line All COS Disable 504 Call Forwarding to Outside Line All COS Disable 505 Executive Busy Override All COS Disable 506 Executive Busy Override
109. CO S2 2 S0 S6 6 S0 BD 4 DID Pulse DTMEF MD 4 DID MFC EM 4 E M E EXT A 16 SLT KX TD1232 e Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C 4 CO S2 2 S0 S6 6 S0 PR 1 PRD BD 4 DID Pulse DTMF MD 4 DID MFC EM 4 ESM EL 1 El El 8 EXT1 E2 8 EXT2 A1 16 SLT1 A2 16 SLT2 Master system only PR EL Default KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display 109 EXPAND C El 2 Press NEXT Display example Master C E Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press gt to programme Area 2 if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area 2 is displayed Press STORE Press END Al nh U KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 Display 109 EXPAND C El 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System General Programming 67 2 2 System Programming IAM W 9 To programme Slave press NEXT again Display example Master C E1 E2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in Area 1 is displayed Press to programme another Area if required Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection in the Area is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 10 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slave C E1 E2 Repeat steps
110. D TIE format number To enter DID TIE format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DID TIE format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID TIE format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty e You must confirm with your central office regarding the number of digits being sent Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID El Line Service TIE Line Service General Programming 203 2 5 Outside Line Programming 434 DID TIE Added Number Description Assigns the added number to the DID and TIE subscriber number which is determined in programme 433 DID TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit This makes the final number which serves as the extension number Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number Selection e DID TIE format number 1 through 8 e Number to be added 4 digits max Default All DID TIE formats Blank Programming 1 Enter 434 Display 434 ADD DIAL 2 Press NEXT Display DID Format NO 3 Enter a DID TIE format number To enter DID format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 4 Enter the number to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5
111. DISA TIE User Codes before making a TIE call Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X X all outside line groups e Non Non security Trunk Outside line security Default All outside line groups Non Programming 1 Enter 439 Display 439 TIE SECURITY 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Non 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group number 1 Features Guide References TIE Line Service 210 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 440 Line Hunting Sequence Description Assigns the hunting sequence of idle lines seizing from the smallest to the largest line number or vice versa in an outside line group on an outside line group basis Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X X all outside line groups Small Large Large Small Default All outside line groups Small gt Large Programming 1 Enter 440 Display 440 LINE HUNT 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT
112. Deny All COS Enable 507 Do Not Disturb Override All COS Disable 508 Account Code Entry Mode All COS Option 509 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA All COS Enable Default Values 429 Programme Default 510 Night Service Access All COS Disable 511 PT Programming Level All COS LVL1 600 EXtra Device Port All jacks Disable 601 Class of Service All jacks 1 2 COS 1 602 Extension Group Assignment All jacks 1 2 Extension group 1 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Immediate ringing Ringing Day Night Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Enable Day Night 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Jack 01 1 All doorphones Other jacks no Day Night doorphone Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes All jacks Not stored 610 Live Call Screening Recording Mode All jacks Stop Rec Assignment 619 Extension Call Forwarding No Answer All jacks 0 Time 620 Lunch Break Group Assignment All groups Blank 621 Cordless PT Extension Port All jacks all outside lines No 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Outgoing calls All Incoming calls On Printout 801 SMDR Format Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 802 System Data Printout Not appli
113. Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 DDI 4 Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed and enter the number if required To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To use this programme DDI conversion number must be selected in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 bit 13 ISDN Programming 339 3 4 Extension Programming Features Guide References Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 340 ISDN Programming Section 4 El Programming El Programming 341 4 1 System Programming 4 1 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 C 4CO S2 280 S6 6 S0 BD 4 DID Pulse DTMF MD 4 DID MFC EM 4 E M E EXT A 16 SLT KX TD1232 e Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 C 4 C0 82 2 S0 S6 6 S0 PR 1 PRI BD 4 DID Pulse DTMF MD 4 DID MFC EM 4 ES M
114. EV or SELECT and the desired code number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID 222 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 452 DID Backward Group B Signal Code for MFC R2 Description Assigns a Direct Inward Dialling DID call backward group B signal code according to your central office service Selection e Code number 01 through 15 e Not Use Idle Busy Congestion Unallocation Default Code 01 Idle Code 02 Not Use Code 03 Busy Code 04 Congestion Code 05 Unallocation Code 6 to Code 15 Not Use Programming 1 Enter 452 Display 452 BWD SIGN GPB 2 Press NEXT Display Code NO gt 3 Enter a code number To enter code number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Idle 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another code press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired code number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 223 2 5 Outside Line Programming 457 458 DIL 1 1 Lunch Break Group Description Assigns a lunch break group to each Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 destination Selection e Outside CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 e Group number 1 through 8
115. EXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 DDI 4 Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed and enter the number if required To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available ISDN Programming 337 3 4 Extension Programming e To use this programme DDI conversion number must be selected in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 bit 13 Features Guide References Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 338 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 618 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension Description Selects the type of additional number for the CLIP and COLP information when making and answering a call through an ISDN line You can select the type from one of the following DDI Subscriber number DDI number None Subscriber number Optional number Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 e Types DDI Any number 6 digits max Default All ports DDI Programming 1 Enter 618 Display 618 ISDN C COLP 2 Press NEXT
116. EXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 156 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions Each number has a maximum of ten digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character xX can be used as a wild card character i e do not care digit The system scans all the ARS Leading Digit Plans simultaneously from left to right The scan ends as soon as the dialled number matches a table entry When using a wild card character it is important to use one in each digit position that must be scanned For example to differentiate local and long distance calls with the same leading digits Plan 1 1 XXxX Plan 2 1 215 Note that three wild card digits were used to ensure that the system scanned the first four digits A shorter string of X s would send all the calls to the Plan 1 carrier Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 157 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Description Assigns the outside line group and modification plan to be used for each route plan and time schedule Programme 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Selection Time schedule A B C D e Outside line group number 1 through 8 e Modification table number 1 through 8 Default All time schedules Not stored Programming
117. Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID El Line Service TIE Line Service 366 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 751 El Break Description Sets a Break for the El line assigned Pulse This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection 60 67 Default 60 Programming 1 Enter 751 Display 751 SBREAK 2 Press NEXT Display example El SBreak 60 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 367 4 4 El Line Programming 752 El Dial Click Tone Description Sets to send a dial click tone of the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Yes to send No not to send Default Yes Programming 1 Enter 752 Display 752 CLICK TONE 2 Press NEXT Display example El CLICK Yes 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions None Features Guide References El Line Service 368 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 753 El Inter Digit Pause Description Sets a time of the inter digit pause for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time milliseconds 630 830 1030 Default 830 ms Programming
118. H01 Undefined 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another channel press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired channel number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company e If Undefined is selected the assignment in programme 741 El Dial Mode is activated e To assign all channels to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for channel 01 Features Guide References El Line Service 362 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 747 El Line Coding Description Sets a line coding for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection AMI HDB3 Default HDB3 Programming 1 Enter 747 Display 747 LINE CODING 2 Press NEXT Display example HDB3 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 363 4 4 El Line Programming 748 El Frame Sequence Description Sets a frame format for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection PCM30 PCM30 CRC Default PCM30 Programming 1 Enter 748 Display 748 FRAME SEQ 2 Press NEXT Display example PCM30 3
119. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed A Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 364 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 749 El Frame Option Description Assigns a frame option for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection C A D B C 0 D 0 C 1 D 0 C 0 D 1 C 1 D 1 Default C 0 D 1 Programming 1 Enter 749 Display 749 FRAME OPTION 2 Press NEXT Display example C 0 D 1 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 365 4 4 El Line Programming 750 El First Dial Timer DR2 TIE Description Sets a timer to prevent the first dial being sent too early on the E1 channels assigned to DR2 and E amp M This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time 001 through 255 X 32 milliseconds is the actual time Default 002 Programming 1 Enter 750 Display 750 FIRST DL TM 2 Press NEXT Display example lst Timer 002 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END un A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company
120. Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You may disable EFA if not required The Flash feature will be in effect in place of EFA Programme 414 Disconnect Time is used to select the time required for the Flash feature e The flash time required is determined by the central office or the host PBX lines e To assign all outside line groups to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 190 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming e Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group Features Guide References External Feature Access Flash General Programming 191 2 5 Outside Line Programming 414 Disconnect Time Description Determines the amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X X all outside line groups e Time seconds 1 5 4 0 Default All outside line groups 1 5 s Programming 1 Enter 414 Display 414 DISCONNECT 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To programme outside line group number 1 you
121. LEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 30 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions e Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 the X and keys and the FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To store a flash signal press FLASH Note The stored flash will only be effective during a call Refer to External Feature Access in the Features Guide To store a hyphen press the button To store a pause press PAUSE Refer to Pause Insertion Automatic in the Features Guide To store a feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals press the X and keys Refer to Pulse to Tone Conversion in the Features Guide To prevent displaying of all or part of the number press SECRET before and after the secret number Secret Dialling e If you are storing an external number include the line access number default 9 0 81 through 88 before the number When dialling a pause is automatically inserted after the line access number e If you are storing an account code enter the account code before the line access number Refer to Account Code Entry in the Features Guide e If you are storing a number for Incoming Outside Call Information
122. LECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Do Not Disturb DND 234 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 508 Account Code Entry Mode Description Determines the account code mode to be used by each Class of Service COS Option mode The user can enter any account code if needed Verified All Calls mode The user must always enter a pre assigned account code to make an outside call Verified Toll Restriction Override mode The user must enter a pre assigned account code when the user needs to override toll restriction Selection Default COS number 1 through 8 X all COS Option Verify All Verified All Calls Verify Toll Verified Toll Restriction Override All COS Option Programming 1 Enter 508 Display 508 ACC CODE OPT Press NEXT Display COS NO gt Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Option Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In thi
123. LP Connected Line Identification Presentation feature offered by the ISDN network service Your El line telephone number is sent to the called party Outgoing AND Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 e Telephone number 16 digits max Default All outside lines Not stored Programming 1 Enter 418 Display 418 CO LINE 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END ISDN Programming 299 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Conditions Each number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt lt Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 or KX TD188 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 Your telephone number will be informed to the called party if the outgoing CLIR feature is di
124. N To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another port press SELECT and the desired port number NAA Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions e Each MSN can be 20 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE ISDN Programming 321 3 3 ISDN Line Programming For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave 1f available This programme becomes available when Multipoint is selected in programme 425 ISDN Configuration Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service 322 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 455 456 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN Description Determines which extension receives a call on a MSN basis of the ISDN port in both the day and night modes Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 e Location number 01 through 10 Extension number 2 through 4 digits 0 operator Disable Default All ports All locations Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 455 for day or 456 for night Display example 455 MSN RING DAY 2 Press NEXT Display
125. N Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN Ringing Service 324 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 460 PRI Configuration Description Assigns the number of B channels which are actually used out of the 30 PRI line channels The CRC4 mode can be also assigned This programme is only available for the KX TD1232 with the Primary Rate Interface ISDN Expansion Unit KX TD290 Selection B channel number 0 through 30 0 no use e CRC4 Enable Disable Default B channel number 0 line CRC4 Enable Programming 1 Enter 460 Display 460 PRI CONFIG 1 2 Press NEXT Display example Use 0 Line 3 Enter the number of B channels 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to assign the CRC4 mode Display example CRC4 Enable 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 8 Press END N Conditions If the available number of B channels are not assigned as 0 Line outside lines 9 through 24 will become No Connect and the assigned B channel numbers of outside lines starting from outside line 25 will become Connect automatically in programme 400 Outside Line Connection Assignment For example if the B channel number is assigned as 3 outside lines 25 through 27 will become Connect Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 325 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 721 PRI El1 Reference CO Description Assigns
126. Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System Programming Guide KX TD816 ose KX TD1232 Please read this manual before using the Digital Super Hybrid System Introduction About this Programming Guide This Programming Guide is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD816 KX TD1232 This manual contains the following sections Section 1 Programming Instructions Provides information about what you need or what you should do before during programming Section 2 General Programming Provides details about the general system programmings Section 3 ISDN Programming Provides details about the system programmings required to use ISDN lines The system is in accordance with European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications below ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP supplementary service ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR supplementary service ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP supplementary service ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR supplementary service ETS 300 064 1 6 Direct Dialling In DDI supplementary service Section 4 E1 Programming Provides details about the system programmings required to use the El line Section 5 Optional Programming Provides details about the optional
127. RG1 1 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END u Conditions e To assign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 e Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group Features Guide References Host PBX Access Pause Insertion Automatic General Programming 189 2 5 Outside Line Programming 413 Flash Time Description Assigns the length of the flash time If your system is installed behind a host PBX External Feature Access EFA is necessary to obtain their services To enable it select a required hooking signal sending time for the outside line group Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X X all outside line groups e Time milliseconds Disable no EFA 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Default All outside line groups 600 ms Programming 1 Enter 413 Display 413 FLASH TIME 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 600 msec 4
128. S Programming 341 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Number Description Assigns the removed digits and added numbers of a received TIE call Digits are removed and added from the beginning of the dialled digits Selection e Location number 01 through 32 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 4 O no deletion e Number to be added 4 digits max Default All locations Deleted digit 0 Added Number Blank Programming 1 Enter 341 Display 341 TIE MODIFY 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press m to programme the number to be added 6 Enter the number to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions Each added number has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 General Programming 167 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Features Guide References TIE Line Service 168 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 400 Outside Line Connection Assignment Description Used to identify the outside lines which are conn
129. SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions e This programming is only effective when you select for charge SMDR Output by programme 816 SMDR Output Mode e This programming will also determine the print out format of the charge fee reference Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference Display Message Station Message Detail Recording SMDR General Programming 117 2 2 System Programming 144 Currency Assignment Description Assigns the currency required for your country Selection 2 characters Max Default Programming 1 Enter 144 Display 144 CURRENCY 2 Press NEXT Display example Currency 3 Enter a currency To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new currency To enter characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters Press STORE Press END n A Conditions If more than two digits are entered they are ignored Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference Display Message 118 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 148 Off Hook Monitor Description Enables or disables to perform the Off Hook Monitor Selection Enable Disable Default Enable Programming 1 Enter 148 Display 148 HOOK MONITOR 2 Press NEXT Display example Monitor Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Pr
130. T Display Jack NO Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display PT PGM Mode Press the CO button which is changed to another button The display shows the contents pre assigned to the button Display example Cco 01 Enter a button code plus parameter if required To change the parameter press CLEAR and enter the new parameter Press STORE To programme another CO button of the same jack repeat steps 4 through 6 To programme another jack press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 Press END Cancelling E 2 3 4 Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above Enter 2 Press STORE Press END General Programming 39 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions A centralised telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack programmed as a manager extension in programme 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable The number of the CO buttons available depends on the telephone type Refer to Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and Consoles in the Features Guide If you press the same CO button again in step 5 you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tones When you enter the tone type number 1 through 8 you wi
131. TRS SPEED DL 2 Press NEXT Display example Override Disable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Select Enable for toll restriction override Select Disable for toll restriction Features Guide References Toll Restriction General Programming 147 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll restricted for each toll restriction level as follows Programme 301 Programme 302 Programme 304 restricts levels 2 through 6 restricts levels 3 through 6 restricts levels 5 through 6 l Programme 303 restricts levels 4 through 6 l Programme 305 restricts level 6 Selection Location number 01 through 20 Toll call number 10 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a programme address 301 through 305 Display example 301 TRS DENY L 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored Enter a toll call number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number Repeat
132. To assign all DID TIE formats to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID TIE format number 1 Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 205 2 5 Outside Line Programming El Line Service TIE Line Service 206 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 436 Outside to TIE Transfer Description Enables or disables transferring an incoming outside call to the TIE line on an outside line group basis This restriction applies to the following 1 A TIE call using DISA 2 Call Forwarding to a TIE line 3 Call Transfer to a TIE line Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X all outside line groups Enable Disable Default All outside line groups Disable Programming 1 Enter 436 Display 436 CO TIE XFER 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside line groups to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for
133. To enter UCD group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example UCD1 TT 4 Enter an overflow extension number Display example UCD1 102 TT 5 Press m gt 6 Enter a Time Table number Display example UCD1 102 TT 1 7 Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions If the overflow extension or Time Table number is not assigned the system will not answer the call and waits for any extension to become idle In this case Intercept Routing No Answer RNA will be employed General Programming 87 2 2 System Programming Features Guide References Uniform Call Distribution UCD 88 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 123 UCD Time Table Description Assigns the queuing sequence in the Uniform Call Distribution UCD Time Table The queuing sequences are as follows S1 Sends S2 Sends S3 Sends S4 Sends DISA Direct Inward System Access outgoing message 1 DISA outgoing message 2 DISA outgoing message 3 DISA outgoing message 4 TR Transfers to the overflow extension RT Returns to the top of the sequence Blank Disconnects 1T Timer 16 seconds 2T Timer 32 seconds 3T Timer 48 seconds 4T Timer 64 seconds Selection Default Time Table number 1 through 4 S1 S2 83 S4 TR RT 1T 2T 3T 4T Blank All time tables Not stored Programming Enter 123 1 RX A A un Disp lay 123 UCD T TABLE Press NEXT Disp
134. a call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that the AA port can be switched to the VM port temporarily e Other programming required programme addresses 106 602 Selection LV MSG GETMSG AA SVC VM SVC e DTMF signal number 16 digits max General Programming 75 2 2 System Programming Default LV MSG H GETMSG H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 Programming 1 Enter 114 Display 114 VM DTMF CMD 2 Press NEXT to programme the LV MSG command To programme another command keep pressing NEXT until the desired command is displayed Display example LV MSG H 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To programme another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 X FLASH and PAUSE e The FLASH button is available only for LV MSG and GETMSG commands to store H which means Home Position e If H is stored for LV MSG a mailbox number programmed in programme 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the VM port Follow On ID function If certain codes are required before and after the ID code insert H between the codes as aaaHbbb If nothing is stored
135. accssashccteasiocwesTaccensvecsoasevtcesss 23 2 General Programming cal 2 1 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 014 015 017 2 2 100 101 102 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 Manager Programming cccsccssssscsssssscsssssccssscscsssscsccssscescccsssscssessssssssssssessessssses 28 Date and Time Seti A 28 System Speed Dialling Number Set ooooonconnccnncccoccconnconncnoncnnncnonccnn nono nano ncnnncrancnnnccona ns 30 System Speed Dialling Name S t ooooonccnnnnnncnnonnnoncnoncnonoconanoncconccnn conc conc crnn conan ran cnn 32 Extension Number Seti iii it 34 Extension Name Sets alle hein ee AAs 36 Flexible CO Button Assignment ce esecsceseceseeeseeseeeseecaeceeceseeeseeeaeeeaaesaeeeseeeaes 38 Operator Manager Extension AsSSIgOhMeNt ooooocccnnnnnoncnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnconccnnacrn nono naco nano 41 Console Port and Paired Telephone AssignMeNt ooooonncnnncnnnnnnocnnonnonancnnccnnnconncnnnccnnanos 43 Absent Messages italia adi 45 Quick Dial Number Set canica A ld td cons 47 NM Name S tima nih edvutetie a a a bane aT a S 48 Budget Ma ag m tn anena innan a yok a E a E Ea vente 49 DISAJ TIE User Code Shiera aee eiii iros 51 System Programming esissessiesssissiisisssror isisisi rieni reiini ia iias 53 Flexible Nuimberin Score A A ld E epteees 53 Day Night Service Switching Mode
136. al attempts e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Redial General Programming 135 2 3 Timer Programming 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time Description Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts Selection Time seconds 3 through 120 X 10 is the actual time Default KX TD816BX KX TD1232 D BX ML KX TDN1232 60 s KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK 900 s 15 min KX TD1232X 30s Programming 1 Enter 210 Display 210 REDIAL TIME 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 60 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e You enter a number from 3 through 120 The actual time is 10 times your input e Programme 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times is used to set the number of times Automatic Redial is tried e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Redial 136 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 211 Dial Start Time Description Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialling after an outside line is seized Selection Time milliseconds 0 through 40 X 100 is the actual time Default KX TD816BX KX TD1232 D BX ML X KX TDN1232 500 ms KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK 1000 ms Programming 1 Enter 211 Display 211 DIAL START 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 500 msec 3 Enter the time To change th
137. aller ID 182 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night Description The Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 feature allows incoming outside calls to be directed to a specific extension When an outside line is assigned as DIL 1 1 it is necessary to assign the destination These programmes specify the extension number for day or night mode Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no DIL 1 1 Default All outside lines Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 407 for day or 408 for night Display example 407 DIL 1 1 DAY 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To disable DIL 1 1 press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available Outside line numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable General Prog
138. ame Error Detection 389 El Frame Option 365 El Frame Sequence 364 El Group A 398 El Group B 399 El Group C 400 E1Group I 396 El Group II 397 E1 Inter Digit Pause 369 El Inter Digit Timer 375 El Line Coding 363 El Meter Pulse Detection Bit Position 383 El Meter Pulse Detection Length 384 El Meter Pulse Detection Mode 382 El MFC R2 Backward Timer 394 El MFC R2 Disappearance Timer 395 El MFC R2 Forward Timer 393 El Pulse Type 373 El Reference CO 326 351 El Sending TIE Caller ID 354 E1 TIE Ringing Service 350 El Tone Type for Making Calls 401 EFA External Feature Access 190 Emergency Dial Number Set 164 END button 12 Entering Characters 17 Entering the programming mode 14 Entering the user programming mode 22 Executive Busy Override 232 Executive Busy Override Deny 233 Expansion Unit Type 67 290 342 Extension ANI Number 347 Index 439 Extension Call Forwarding No Answer Time 257 Extension Group Assignment 245 Extension hooking signal 407 Extension Name Set 36 Extension Number Set 34 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN 323 Extensions Used for Programming 10 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit 228 406 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Time 131 External Feature Access EFA 190 External music source 407 External Pager BGM 269 External Pager Confirmation Tone 271 EXtra Device Port XDP 15 35 42 44 241 Extra Entry Table Selection 162 F Fi
139. amme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all jacks Stop Rec Stop Recording Keep Rec Keep Recording Default All jacks Stop Rec Programming 1 Enter 610 Display 610 LCS REC MODE 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Stop Rec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods General Programming 255 2 7 Extension Programming e To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01 Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 256 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 619 Extension Call Forwarding No Answer Time Description The number of ring
140. art 2 second part e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD 1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Enabl enable Disab disable Default All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Enable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 605 for day or 606 for night Display example 605 CO DAY OUT 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the desired outside line number or keep pressing gt or lt until the desired outside line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END General Programming 249 2 7 Extension Programming Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e To assign all jacks or all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 or 4 In these cases the display sh
141. assigned a name the called party s telephone will show the name in place of the ID Code 70 General Programming 2 2 System Programming e Programme 406 Caller ID Assignment is used to enable the Caller ID Service on an outside line basis Features Guide References Caller ID General Programming 71 2 2 System Programming 111 Caller ID Name Set Description With Caller ID Service the calling party is displayed either by its ID Code or by its name If the name display is required use this programme to give a name to a caller ID Code stored in programme 110 Caller ID Code Set Selection e Location number 001 through 500 e Caller ID Name 15 characters max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 111 Display 111 CALLER NAME 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a Caller ID Name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Caller ID Name corresponds to the Caller ID Codes stored in programme 110 Caller ID Code Set Features Guide References
142. at NO 3 Enter a DID TIE format number To enter DID TIE format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Wink 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another DID TIE format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID TIE format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END u Conditions To assign all DID TIE formats to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programed for DID TIE format number 1 Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 199 2 5 Outside Line Programming El Line Service TIE Line Service 200 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 432 DID TIE Outgoing Assignment Description Assigns a DID and TIE outgoing method immediate or wink to each DID TIE format according to your central office service Immediate Outgoing DID and TIE numbers can be transmitted right after seizing the outside line Wink Outgoing DID and TIE numbers can be transmitted after receiving the wink signal from the central office after seizing the outside line Selection DID TIE format number 1 through 8 X all DID TIE formats e Immediate Wink Default All DID TIE formats Wink Programming 1 Enter 432 Display 432 SIGNAL OUT 2 Press NEXT Display Format NO 3 Enter a DID TIE format
143. atures Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 159 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit Description Determines how the dialled number should be modified before transmitting to the central office You can delete the digits from the beginning of the dialled number Selection e Modification table number 1 through 8 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 9 O no deletion Default All modification tables 0 Programming 1 Enter 330 Display 330 ARS REMOVE 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table 3 Enter a modification table number To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of eight Modification Tables each of which can be given a number of digits to be deleted Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS 160 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 331 ARS Modify Added Number Description Determines how the dialled number should be modified before transmitting to the central office Assigned numbers are added to the beginning of the dialled number Selection e Modification table n
144. ber This programme assigns the TIE line access number and outside line group hunt sequence Selection e Location number 01 through 32 TIE line access number 1 through 3 digits e Outside line group hunt sequence number 1 through 8 5 entries max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 340 Display 340 TIE ROUTE 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 4 Enter a TIE line access number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press m to programme the outside line group hunt sequence number 6 Enter an outside line group hunt sequence number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END General Programming 165 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions e Each TIE line access number has a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and X The character X can be used as a wild card character e Programme 341 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Number is used to modify the TIE line access number Features Guide References TIE Line Service 166 General Programming 2 4 TRS AR
145. cable 803 Music Source Use Hold and BGM Music 1 804 External Pager BGM All external pagers Disable 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone On 430 Default Values Programme Default 806 807 Serial Interface RS 232C Port 1 Port 2 Parameters New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity bit Mark Stop bit 1 809 DISA Security Type Trunk 810 DISA Tone Detection Enable 812 DISA DTMF Repeat Dial and Call Repeat 813 Floating Number Assignment Pager 1 196 Pager 2 197 Pager 3 296 Pager 4 297 DISA 1 198 DISA 2 298 MODEM 299 E Grp 1 191 E Grp 2 192 E Grp 3 193 E Grp 4 194 E Grp 5 291 E Grp 6 292 E Grp 7 293 E Grp 8 294 814 Modem Standard CCITT 815 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Disable Number 816 SMDR Output Mode Regular 817 KX TD197 KX TD198 Baud Rate Set V 34 33600 3 ISDN Programming Number Conversion Programme Default 012 ISDN Extension Number Set All ports Not stored 013 ISDN Extension Name Set All ports Not stored 018 Budget Management for ISDN Extension All ports 0 109 Expansion Unit Type KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 112 ISDN Network Type Assignment KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK Mode 39 Others Mode 51 140 DDI Number Phantom Extension All locations Blank Default Values 431 Progra
146. can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 1 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line group number u 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e The disconnect time must be longer than the requirements of the central office or the host PBX e To assign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 e Programme 401 Outside Line Group Assignment is used to assign each outside line to an outside line group Features Guide References Flash 192 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Description Enables or disables Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection during the time between the originated outside call and the established outside call If this is enabled the system disconnects the line with the time set in programme 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set when the CPC Signal is detected Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Enable detection Disable no detection Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 415 Display 415 CPC OUTGOING 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside l
147. ccccesceceseceeseceesaeceaaeceeneeeeeeeeesaeceaaeceeaeceeaeeceeeeeeaeens 356 741 El Dial Modena NERAN pieeisaiss 357 742 BV CPCAIN A tati 359 743 El CPC OUD ui NA lea E A tie 360 Table of Contents 7 744 El DID Receive Digiti vccsccaceccherss evs coil eies cadatvenade cots son a a a a a iion 361 745 VET DR2 Receiver piscis stan 362 TAT ELEmeS Codi dial 363 7148 E1 Frame SEQuenCe ci A dd E A 364 7149 Ele Frame Options eanne ae E Tia rated 365 750 El First Dial Timer DR2 TIE cccccccsscccssssececssssscecseaaeecssaeceeseaeeeesecaeeeeeses 366 PASE SEP GG Break ci a diia eaa ida dias di dd 367 752 El Dial Click Tone 0 A a iaa 368 753 El Inter Dist Pals A A AA E di 369 754 E Elash Detective ideo 370 755 El Answer Decision Timer cc is c sc2sc cess sescstscdccessessassestae des ssdevensage aad eiat 371 756 El Seizure ACK Wait Timer cece cccccccsssscceceeceesessseceeececesssseeesesesenssseeeeeeceses 372 EST CET Pulse Type fires faite ret levi aed actin ee AA AA 373 138 EEDR2 Signalling Type iis ane anil Aisa 374 759 Et Inter Digit TM lee et ATR ias 375 760 El Bit Position for Dial Pulse ooooooncnnccnononononanonononononnnononnnnonononnnnnnnconononnanononos 376 761 El Bit Position for Clear Back ooooooononnnncnnnnononooancnocnnnnonnnnnonconononnnnnnnnncononnana nacos 377 7621 ELE amp M Signaling Pernia ide 378 763 El E amp M Pulse Length Seizure
148. ck number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter the ANI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available El Programming 347 4 3 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Features Guide References El Line Service 348 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 707 E1 Clock Mode Description Assigns a clock mode for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection External Internal Default External Programming 1 Enter 707 Display 707 CLOCK MODE 2 Press NEXT Display example External 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions If External is selected the system works using the external clock of the central office or the other
149. cnocnnanonanac nnnns 251 609 Voice Mail Access COdES cccccccccncnoninincnnacacanananananna nana na nene nenencn nono aiii 253 610 Live Call Screening Recording Mode AssignhMeNt cooooonocnonccnoccnonoconccnnnnanncanacannninnoo 255 619 Extension Call Forwarding No Answer TiM6 ocoocccnnnccnnonicinnncnonononnnnnonnnacanaconnnno 257 620 Lunch Break Group Assignment oooooconnccnocononoconononnnnnncnnn nono nonn oran n conc cnn ac on ncnnnccn naaa 259 621 Cordless PT Extension Porta lala taa tas 260 2 8 Resource ProgramMin scccsssccccsssscccsssssccsssssccsssssscccsssscccsssscccsssscsssssscsssssssescnes 262 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log PrintOUt oonconnncnnncnnocanonnnonnnannnonnnanocanacinnoo 262 SOL SMDR Format nin reaches a eos eii ado 264 802 System Data Printouts aineen eia E E E E E EE e 265 803 RS AA IN 267 804 External Pager BGM ce eecccecscceeseeeeececceeeeeaecesaeceeaceneaeeceaeeceaeeeeaeeeeaaeeseaeeseeeeees 269 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone ecceccceecccesseceenceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeaeceeaeceaaeceeeeeees 271 806 807 Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters coocccnnononononcnonnnnonannnnnnnnononnonnnnnnnnnnonono 272 809 DISA Security Ty pe riserts itenni eieiei ae aiaa asetat 274 STO DISA Tone Detection oirrne diia TEE ada 275 312 DISADTME Repeat AAA 276 813 Floating Number AsSIgNMeNt oooconncnnncnnonnnoncnnnconnconncnnncnnnnnnnonnnc non cnn nan nr
150. consisting of 0 through 9 328 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave 1f available e For an explanation on jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e To use this programme DDI conversion number must be selected in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 bit 13 Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDD ISDN Programming 329 3 4 Extension Programming 612 DDI Number Floating Number Conversion Description Used to convert a Direct Dialling In DDI number to an floating number in order to place an incoming DDI call at a specific floating station Selection e Floating Station Operator Pager 1 Pager 2 Pager 3 Pager 4 DISA 1 DISA 2 MODEM EXT Group 1 EXT Group 2 EXT Group 3 EXT Group 4 EXT Group 5 EXT Group 6 EXT Group 7 EXT Group 8 Pager 2 through 4 are available for the KX TD1232 only DDI Number 6 digits max Default All floating stations Blank Programming 1 Enter 612 Display 612 FLOAT DDI 2 Press NEXT to programme the operator Display Operator 3 Enter a DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR 4 Press STORE 5 To programme another floating station press NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 6 Repeat ste
151. d Answer Time Description Assigns the number of rings between a call received and the answer by the Direct Inward System Access DISA feature Selection Number of rings 0 through 6 Default 1 ring Programming 1 Enter 213 Display 213 DISA ANSWER 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA General Programming 139 2 3 Timer Programming 214 DISA Prolong Time Description Sets the maximum allowable prolonged time for an outside to outside line call via the Direct Inward System Access DISA feature An outside to outside line call is initially limited by the Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time Programme 206 However the DISA caller can prolong the call after hearing the warning tones by pressing any key except the x key The DISA prolong time sets the duration of these extended periods Selection Time minutes 0 through 7 O no prolonging Default 3 min Programming 1 Enter 214 Display 214 DISA PROLONG 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 3 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e Do not confuse thi
152. e Path IN perio dd eee ee 212 442 Voice Level Trad tadas basil airada lanar TENE A R NR ERER 213 443 Voice Level Recto Aa 214 444 TTE Receive Dial a ta tado Laa tati 215 445 DID Forward Timer for MFC R2 sssessssseessseersssseesssseessseesssssesssseeesssresssssesssseressse 216 446 DID Backward Timer for MEC R2 coooococnonoccccnooonccnononnnononnnnccnnnnnccnnnnnccnnnnnccnnn ono 217 447 DID Disappearance Timer for MFC R2 coooocnccccconccnonnnononncnonononnncnononocnnncccnnncnnncnnnnns 218 448 DID First Dial Start Time for MFC R2 ooooonoccccccononcccnononcncnnonnnoconnnonocnnnnnnncnnnnnnnono 219 449 DID Forward Group I Signal Code for MFC R2 0ooooconcccoccnococonoconccnncconccnnccnnncnnnos 220 Table of Contents 5 450 DID Forward Group II Signal Code for MFC R2 coooooconocccnoncccnncnconnncnonncconnnonnnnn n 221 451 DID Backward Group A Signal Code for MFC R2 c0oococcnccccnoncnononaccnnncnnnccnnacona n 222 452 DID Backward Group B Signal Code for MFC R2 eee eseeseeesecenecnseenseeeneees 223 457 458 DIL 1 1 Lunch Break Group 0 0 eeccceseeeceseeeenaeceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeeenaees 224 2 6 COS ProsramiMine viccccccesccssstessesdssesossevcceasessssesvonss strosscasesbeseswurtsonssesuseduapeseussdeaecsvede 226 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night ooonconnccnnccnnoccnoncnoncconcnonoconacnnnonnnananonncannnos 226 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit oo
153. e Programming Group Description Address SXX Resource Programming Assignment of customer supplied peripherals connected to the system 9XX Optional Programming Used to answer the user s requirements or troubles if needed Programming Instructions 25 1 6 Programming Example 26 Programming Instructions Section 2 General Programming General Programming 27 2 1 Manager Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 000 Date and Time Set Description Sets the current date and time A 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock can be selected Selection e Year 00 through 99 e Month Jan through Dec e Day 1 through 31 e Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM e Clock hour 12 or 24 Default 93 Jan 1 FRI 12 00 AM 12 Programming 1 Enter 000 Display 000 DATE TIME 2 Press NEXT Display example 93 Jan 1 FRI 3 Enter the year To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new year Press m Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed Press m Enter the day NSN UA To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new day 8 Press a gt 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT Display example 12 00 PM 24 28 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 12 Enter the hour To c
154. e current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions e You enter a number from 0 through 40 The actual time is a 100 times your input e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Outside Line Access General Programming 137 2 3 Timer Programming 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of dialling and the start of the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and this timer expires the system starts counting the call A display telephone shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record Selection Time seconds 0 through 60 Default Os Programming 1 Enter 212 Display 212 CALL TIMER 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 0 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialled This timer does not apply to incoming calls The timer for incoming calls starts immediately e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Display Message Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 138 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 213 DISA Delaye
155. e is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Level 01 through 16 Default 08 Programming 1 Enter 772 Display 772 MFC RX DSP 2 Press NEXT Display MFC RX 08 Ge Enter a level Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 388 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 773 El Frame Error Detection Description Sets the frame error detection for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection No Yes Default No Programming 1 Enter 773 Display 773 ERR DETECT 2 Press NEXT Display example Error Detect No 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions None Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 389 4 4 El Line Programming 774 El Error Rate Description Sets the number of times of the frame error detection for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Number of times 0 through 7 X 16 is the actual number of time O no limit Default 0 Programming 1 Enter 774 Display 774 ERR RATE 2 Press NEXT Display example Error RATE 0 3 Enter the number of times To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of times 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Adjust to a
156. eak Group 224 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 247 Direct In Lines DIL 183 224 247 DISA TIE User Codes 51 DISA AA Wait Time 144 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number 280 DISA Delayed Answer Time 139 DISA DTMF Repeat 276 DISA outside to outside line extending time 409 DISA Prolong Time 140 DISA Security Type 274 DISA Tone Detection 275 Disconnect Time 192 Do Not Disturb Override 234 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 251 DSS button 38 DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency 173 DTMF command signals 75 DTMF mode 173 DTMF signals 73 405 414 DTMF Time 177 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF 173 E E amp M Signal Assignment 99 El Break 367 El ANI Maximum Digits 392 El ANI Service Mode 391 El Answer Decision Timer 371 El Answer Wait Timer 353 El Bit Position for Clear Back 377 E1 Bit Position for Dial Pulse 376 E1 Channel Assignment 356 El Clock Mode 349 El CPC IN 359 El CPC OUT 360 El Dial Click Tone 368 El Dial Mode 357 El DID Receive Digit 361 El DR2 Receiver 362 El DR2 Signalling Type 374 El DSP Gain DTMF Receive 386 El DSP Gain DTMF Transmit 385 El DSP Gain MFC R2 Receive 388 El DSP Gain MFC R2 Transmit 387 El E amp M Pulse Length Answer 380 El E amp M Pulse Length Clear 381 El E amp M Pulse Length Seizure 379 El E amp M Signalling Type 378 El Error Rate 390 El First Dial Timer DR2 TIE 366 El Flash Detection 370 El Fr
157. ected telephone company e To assign all channels to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for channel 01 Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 359 4 4 El Line Programming 743 E1 CPC OUT Description Sets a CPC signal detection time to each El channel on making a call This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e El channel number 01 through 30 X X All El channels Time 00 through 15 X 80 milliseconds is the actual time 00 no detection Default All El channels 02 Programming 1 Enter 743 Display 743 El CPC OUT 2 Press NEXT Display CH NO gt 3 Enter a channel number To enter a channel number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CH01 02 4 Enter a time To assign no time press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another channel press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired channel number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company e To assign all channels to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for channel 01 Features Guide References El Line Service 360 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 744 El DID Receive Digit Description Sets a maximum number of the received dial digits for each E1 channel ass
158. ected to the system s This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not connected Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 X all outside lines e Connect No Connect Default All outside lines Connect If KX TD290 or KX TD188 is connected All outside lines in the Slave System No Connect Programming 1 Enter 400 Display 400 CO CONNECT 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Connect 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available General Programming 169 2 5 Outside Line Programming e Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 or KX TD188 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Outside Line Connection Assignment 170 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programmin
159. ed before this timer expires the call will be disconnected e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Call Forwarding 128 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 203 Intercept Time Description Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA feature If a call is not answered after the programmed number of rings the call is redirected to the programmed extension Selection Number of rings 3 through 48 Default 12 rings Programming 1 Enter 203 Display 203 INTERCEPT 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e Programmes 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night are used to programme the destination of Intercept Routing on an outside line group basis in day and night modes e Ifthe original extension has set Call Forwarding No Answer Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Intercept Routing General Programming 129 2 3 Timer Programming 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time Description Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialling If the telephone user lifts the handset the programmed party is called when the time expires Selection Time seconds
160. ed to perform the Call Transfer to Outside Line function Selection COS number 1 through 8 X all COS e Enable Disable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 503 Display 503 CALL XFER CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Call Transfer 230 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 504 Call Forwarding to Outside Line Description Determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to Outside Line function Selection e COS number 1 through 8 X all COS e Disable Enable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 504 Display 504 CALL FWD CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS nu
161. election Except 2 333 TRS Entry Code Assignment for Extra All locations Not stored Table 334 Emergency Dial Number Set All locations Not stored 340 TIE Line Routing Table All locations Not stored 341 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added All locations Deleted digit 0 Added Number Number Blank 400 Outside Line Connection Assignment All outside lines Connect If KX TD290 or KX TD188 is connected All outside lines in the Slave System No Connect 401 Outside Line Group Assignment CO01 TRG 1 CO02 TRG 2 C003 TRG 3 CO04 TRG 4 CO05 TRG 5 CO06 TRG 6 CO07 TRG 7 CO08 TRG 8 for KX TD816 CO08 through CO54 TRG 8 for KX TD1232 402 Dial Mode Selection KX TD816BX KX TD1232 D BX ML KX TDN1232 All outside lines Pulse KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK X All outside lines DTMF 403 Pulse Speed Selection All outside lines 10 pps 404 DTMF Time All outside lines 80 ms 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set All outside lines Disable 406 Caller ID Assignment All outside lines Disable Default Values 427 Programme Default 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night All outside lines Disable Day Night 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night All outside line groups Disable Day Night 411 Host PBX Access Codes All outside line groups Not stored 412
162. elephone port is connected to the KX TD194 port Selection e Unit TD194 number KX TD816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 6 e Message waiting port number 01 through 16 e Single line telephone jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Sub port number 1 or 2 1 main port 2 XDP single line telephone port Default All units All message waiting ports Not stored Programming 1 Enter 132 Display 132 MW PORT SET 2 Press NEXT Display MW UNIT NO gt 3 Enter a unit number To enter unit number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Ul MW J 4 Enter a message waiting port number Display example Ul MW 01J 5 Press gt 6 Enter a single line telephone jack number Display example Ul MW 01J 15 7 Press gt 8 Enter a sub port number Display example Ul MW 01J 15 2 9 Press STORE 10 To programme another message waiting port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired message waiting port number 11 Repeat steps 5 through 10 104 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 12 Press END Conditions e To programme another unit start from step 1 e For the KX TD1232 the unit numbers 1 through 3 are for the Master System and 4 through 6 are for the Slave System and jack numbers 01 through 32 are for Master System and 33 through 64 are for Slave System e For the KX TD1232 single line telephone jacks connected to the
163. er Table for DDI Call and then the DDI number must be assigned in programme 136 DID DDI Number Assignment Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDD Direct Inward Dialling DID Day Night Service General Programming 111 2 2 System Programming 139 DID DDI Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the Direct Inward Dialling DID or Direct Dialling In DDI extension assigned in programme 136 DID DDI Number Assignment Selection e Location number 001 through 200 Extension number 10 characters max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 139 Display 139 DID NAME 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e A DID DDI extension name is displayed only when the Transfer Table is used e You can programme the initial display as the DID DDI extension name in Station Programming Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDD 112 General Programming 2 2 System Programming
164. er a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective ISDN Progra mming 319 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Extension 320 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 454 MSN Assignment Description Assigns a maximum of ten Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 e Location number 01 through 10 e MSN 20 digits max Default All ports All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 454 Display 454 MSN ASSIGN 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 01 Not Stored Location number Port number 4 Enter a MS
165. er parameters 00 Programming 1 Enter 782 Display 782 GROUP A 2 Press NEXT Display Parameter NO 3 Enter a parameter number To enter a parameter number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 03 4 Enter the signal code To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another parameter press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired parameter number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 398 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 783 El Group B Description Assigns a signal code for Group B parameters on the El line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Parameter number 01 Idle 1 02 Idle 2 03 Idle 3 04 No Billing 05 Busy 06 Unallocated 07 Congestion 08 Out of Service 09 Collect Call Reject e Signal code 00 through 15 00 Undefined Default Parameter 01 01 Parameter 05 02 Parameter 06 03 Parameter 07 and 08 04 Other parameters 00 Programming 1 Enter 783 Display 783 GROUP B 2 Press NEXT Display Parameter NO gt 3 Enter a parameter number To enter a parameter number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 01 4 Enter the signal code To change the current entry press CLEAR
166. ervice ends at the assigned time For example If Lunch is 3 00 4 00 PM Day mode starts at 4 01 PM If Lunch is 3 00 3 59 PM Day mode starts at 4 00 PM Features Guide References Day Night Service General Programming 121 2 2 System Programming 151 Break Service Starting Ending Time Description Sets the Break starting and ending time for each day of the week Selection e Day of the week selection number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday every day of the week e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 0 through 59 e AM PM Default Every day of the week 3 00 3 29 PM Programming 1 Enter 150 Display 151 BREAK TIME 2 Press NEXT Display Day of Week gt 3 Enter the day of the week selection number To select Sunday you can also press NEXT Display example Sun BGN 3 00PM 4 Enter the hour of starting time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 5 Press gt 6 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new minutes 7 Press gt 8 Press SELECT for AM or PM 9 Press STORE 10 To programme another break mode or day of the week press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the day of the week selection number 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 12 Press END 122 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Conditions e This feature can only be used
167. escription Selection Default Features Guide References 05 For VM DPT Integration Enables or disables sending the Follow On ID when an outside call is routed to a voice mail port by IRNA For VM Inband Integration Enables or disables sending the Follow On ID when an outside call is routed to a voice mail port by IRNA e When the port is in AA service mode enable the mode will change to the VM service mode disable the mode will not be changed e When the port is in VM service mode enable the mode will not be changed disable the mode will change to the AA service mode 0 enable 1 disable 1 e Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones e Voice Mail Integration for Inband Reserved Enables or disables dial tone 2 when an extension sets programmable extension features such as Call Waiting 0 disable 1 enable 1 None 10 Determines the result when pressing the FLASH button during an outside call When Area 01 bit 3 0 Flash Disconnects and accesses the same outside line Terminate Terminates the outside line and accesses the intercom It is convenient to route the outside call according to ARS if ARS is active 0 Terminate 1 Flash 1 Flash 11 Selects the message waiting ring type 3 quick rings or 2 normal rings for single line telephones 0 3 times by 40 ms 1 2 times by 280 ms 1 Message Waiting
168. ess STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 371 4 4 El Line Programming 756 El Seizure ACK Wait Timer Description Sets the waiting time to acknowledge the seizure of the El line assigned to DR2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time 01 through 20 X 0 5 seconds is the actual time Default 05 Programming 1 Enter 756 Display 756 SEIZ ACK WI 2 Press NEXT Display example Seiz Ack WT 05 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 372 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 757 E1 Pulse Type Description Sets a dialling pulse type for the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Type A Type B Type C Default Type A Programming 1 Enter 757 Display 757 PULSE TYPE 2 Press NEXT Display example Type A 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 373 4 4 El Line Programming 758 El DR2 Signalling Type Description
169. ess STORE Press END u Conditions Off Hook Monitor is only available for the KX T7433 and KX T7436 telephone users Features Guide References Off Hook Monitor General Programming 119 2 2 System Programming 150 Lunch Service Starting Ending Time Description Sets the Lunch starting and ending time for each day of the week Selection e Day of the week selection number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday every day of the week e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 0 through 59 e AM PM Default Every day of the week 12 00 12 59 PM Programming 1 Enter 150 Display 150 LUNCH TIME 2 Press NEXT Display Day of Week 3 Enter the day of the week selection number To select Sunday you can also press NEXT Display example Sun BGN 12 00PM 4 Enter the hour of starting time 5 Press a gt 6 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new minutes 7 Press gt 8 Press SELECT for AM or PM 9 Press STORE 10 To programme another lunch mode or day of the week press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the day of the week selection number 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 12 Press END 120 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Conditions e This programming can only be used if Auto automatic is selected in programme 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode e Lunch Break s
170. ethod 3 See Combination Table b Procedures The display shows 1 Enter 6 6 2 Rotate Jog Dial one pulse M 3 Enter 4 M4 4 Rotate Jog Dial six pulse Mi 5 Enter 5 Mi5 6 Rotate Jog Dial four pulses Mik 7 Enter 3 Mik3 8 Rotate Jog Dial four pulses Mike 20 Programming Instructions 1 4 Entering Characters OR Procedures The display shows 1 Enter 2 2 2 Rotate Jog Dial until M appears M 3 Enter 2 M2 4 Rotate Jog Dial until i appears Mi 5 Enter 2 Mi2 6 Rotate Jog Dial until k appears Mik 7 Enter 2 Mik2 8 Rotate Jog Dial until e appears Mike zZ e far e To erase all the letters press CLEAR e To erase the last letter press lt lt Programming Instructions 21 1 5 User Programming 1 5 User Programming Mode User Programming Mode Manager programming items programme address 0OXX are accessible by any display proprietary telephone user in the system Entering the user programming mode You can access these programmes by entering the User Programming Mode as follows Before entering the mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook e No calls are on hold at your telephone Press PROGRAM or PAUSE x and enter the User Password default 1234 After entering the mode perform the same programming steps as the system programming steps in each programme address
171. example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 170 177 178 181 through 184 KX TD1232 165 through 188 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 198 291 through 294 296 through 299 Programme 004 Extension Name Set is used to name the extension numbers Features Guide References Call Directory Display Message EXtra Device Port XDP Flexible Numbering Intercom Calling General Programming 35 2 1 Manager Programming 004 Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in programme 003 Extension Number Set Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part Name 10 characters max Default All jacks Not stored Programming 1 Enter 004 Display 004 EXT NAME SET 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display
172. g 401 Outside Line Group Assignment Description Each outside line must be assigned to an outside line group This programme defines the outside line group assignment for each outside line For example if there are multiple telephone service companies available the outside lines can be grouped by company Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 X all outside lines e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 Default CO01 TRG 1 CO02 TRG 2 C003 TRG 3 CO04 TRG 4 CO05 TRG 5 CO06 TRG 6 C007 TRG 7 CO08 TRG 8 for KX TD816 CO08 through CO54 TRG 8 for KX TD1232 Programming 1 Enter 401 Display 401 CO GROUP 1 8 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 TRG1 4 Enter the outside line group number To change the current entry enter the new outside line group number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 General Programming 171 2 5 Outside Line Programming 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave 1f available e Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when
173. g e Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT KX T7436 KX T7433 KX T7235 KX T7230 e Analogue Proprietary Telephone APT KX T7130 KX T7030 KX T7033 Extensions Used for Programming Connect one of the above mentioned telephone sets to either of the following e Jack number 1 e Jack programmed as a manager extension To assign the manager extension see Section 2 1 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment User Programming Manager Programming Manager programming items are allowed for any display proprietary telephone user in the system See Section 1 5 User Programming Mode 10 Programming Instructions 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPT Three soft buttons are provided just below the display of Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 and KX T7235 The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance step by step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display See Viewing the Display in this section for more information on the display lines If the SHIFT button indicator is on two functions are available with each soft button To alternate between the two functions press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display Soft button variations Type 1 Example Chip eho KX T7230 Display
174. g ring tone will not be sent to single line telephone users Features Guide References Message Waiting General Programming 101 2 2 System Programming 131 Message Waiting Lamp Assignment Description Assigns the message waiting light pattern Selection Message waiting light pattern number 01 through 12 Default 1 Programming 1 Enter 131 Display 131 MW LAMP 2 Press NEXT Display MW LAMP NO 1 3 Enter a message waiting light number Display example MW LAMP NO 12 Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e The available message waiting light patterns are as follows 102 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Pattern 01 Pattern 02 Pattern 03 Pattern 04 Pattern 05 Pattern 06 Pattern 07 Pattern 08 Pattern 09 Pattern 10 Pattern 11 Pattern 12 I 5s lt i l 1 l I 1 1 25s I i I I 1 1500 ms i i i i 1 1250 ms l l 1 l I BS I 1250 ms 250 ms 1 l 1 l I I I 1500 ms 500 ms 1 10 as l kE gt i i i 1 otal 20 as i 1 l 1 I I 1250 ms 1 5s k ofl I l 1 l I 11 258 1 25s 1 l l l l IL A I 1900 ms 500 ms 1 I l I l L I 1250 ms 250 ms I i i 1 l 500 ms 500 ms l 11 25s 1 25s 1 25s 1 25s y I I l I F250 ms 250 ms Features Guide References Message Waiting General Programming 103 2 2 System Programming 132 Message Waiting Port Set Description Assigns which single line t
175. gnalling on the El channels assigned to TIE This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Outside CO line number 25 through 54 X X all outside lines from 25 to 54 e Yes to send No not to send Default All outside lines No Programming 1 Enter 723 Display 723 TIE CALL ID 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter an outside line number 25 you can also press NEXT Display example CO Line NO 25 4 Press NEXT Display example CO25 No 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 6 9 Press END Conditions e This feature is only available between Panasonic PBXs which support a Caller ID on the DTMF e IfaPBX code is assigned PBX code extension number will be sent If not assigned only the extension number will be sent 354 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming Features Guide References El Line Service TIE Line Service El Programming 355 4 4 El Line Programming 740 El Channel Assignment Description Assigns a channel type to each El channel This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e El channel number 01 through 30 X All El channels e Channel type DR2 EX M C EXM P Disable Default
176. grammed for Monday Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 155 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 Description By entering numbers into each leading digit plan programmes below you are starting the process to determine which outside line group will be used to route the call Programme 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These eight plans are used to analyse the number which the user dials and decide the route plan for the call If the user dialled number is registered in Plan 1 then Routing Plan 1 is selected for the call Automatic Route Selection ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 match ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 programmes 322 through 329 respectively Selection e Location number 001 through 100 e Leading digit number 10 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a program address 314 through 321 Display example 314 ARS LEAD D 1 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a leading digit number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press N
177. gt If an ISDN extension number is assigned as 3 284 ISDN Programming 3 1 Manager Programming 30 through 39 are effective as MSN s The extension user can call any terminal equipment on the ISDN SO bus with MSN individually Pressing 30 calls all extensions on the ISDN SO bus simultaneously e Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e An extension number is invalid if the first or second digit does not match with the setting in programme 100 Flexible Numbering Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks e Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 170 177 178 181 through 184 KX TD1232 165 through 188 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored 813 Floating Number Assignment KX TD816 191 through 194 196 198 291 through 294 298 299 KX TD1232 191 through 194 196 through 198 291 through 294 296 through 299 e Programme 013 ISDN Extension Name Set is used to give names to the extension numbers Features Guide References Integrated Se
178. h Stop Bit Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 e The programme address of the out of service system port is unacceptable Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR General Programming 273 2 8 Resource Programming 809 DISA Security Type Description Assigns the security mode for outside calls attempted by the DISA Direct Inward System Access caller There are three modes as follows Non Security mode allows the caller to access an outside line without dialling a DISA user code Trunk Outside Line Security mode requires the caller to enter a DISA user code before making an outside call All Security mode requires the caller to enter a DISA user code before making both an outside call and an intercom call Selection Non non security Trunk outside line security All all security Default Trunk Programming 1 Enter 809 Display 809 DISA SECURE 2 Press NEXT Display example Security Trunk 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Programme 017 DISA TIE User Codes is used to programme DISA user codes Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 274 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 810 DISA Tone Detection Description Enables or disables Tone Detection for outside to outside line calls via the Direct Inward System Access DISA featu
179. hange the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new hour 13 Press gt 14 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new minute 15 Press gt 16 Press SELECT for AM or PM 17 Press gt 18 Press SELECT for 12 or 24 clock hour 19 Press STORE 20 Press END Conditions e After changing an entry you can press STORE You do not have to perform the rest of the steps e To return to a previous field press lt Q in steps 4 through 9 and steps 13 through 18 e If you hear an alarm after pressing STORE check that the date is valid e The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed e You cannot leave an entry empty Features Guide References Display Message General Programming 29 2 1 Manager Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set Description Used to programme the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 500 numbers available from 000 to 499 Selection e Speed dial number 000 through 499 e Telephone number 24 digits max Default All speed dial numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 001 Display 001 SYS SPD DIAL 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press C
180. hat time According to the service hours and charges offered by your carriers enter the starting time of each zone Selection Default Day of the week 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 7 Sun all days Time schedule A B C D Time hour 1 through 12 Disable no schedule AM PM All days of the week A 8 00 AM B 5 00 PM C 9 00 PM D Disable Programming 1 RX A A un 9 Enter 313 Display 313 ARS TIME SET Press NEXT Display Day of week Enter the day of the week Display example Mon A 8 00 AM To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed Enter the hour To set no schedule Disable press SELECT and go to step 6 If Disable is selected pressing SELECT shows the previous stored hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new hour Press m to select AM PM Press SELECT for AM or PM Press STORE To programme another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END 154 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions e Enter a starting time for each time schedule Select Disable for idle schedules e You cannot leave an entry empty e To assign all days of the week press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents pro
181. he KX TD1232 VM 01 through VM 12 are for the Master System and VM 13 through VM 24 are for the Slave System 1f available e The display shows VM XX YY 1 EXG Z in step 3 XX means a voice mail number YY means the jack number of the voice mail port General Programming 83 2 2 System Programming programmed in 117 Voice Mail Number Assignment 1 of Y Y 1 means the first part of the jack number in digital line Y Y 2 means the second part of the jack number in digital line e To assign all voice mail numbers to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for voice mail number 01 Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 84 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 120 User Password Description Assigns the password required for entering the User Programming mode In the User Programming mode any display digital proprietary telephone user in the system can set the Manager Programmings Programme address 0XX Selection Password 4 through 7 digits Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 120 Display 120 USR PASSWORD 2 Press NEXT Display example Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The password can be from four to seven digits long consisting of 0 through 9 e If less tha
182. hrough 16 it is required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in programme 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 124 Phantom Extension Number Set and 813 Floating Number Assignment Features Guide References Flexible Numbering 56 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Description This programme is used to determine if night mode is set automatically or manually Selection Manual Auto automatic Default Manual Programming 1 Enter 101 Display 101 DAY NT AUTO 2 Press NEXT Display example D N Mode Manual 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions e Ifautomatic switching is assigned day night mode is switched at the time programmed in 102 Day Night Service Starting Time e The operator and manager can switch the day night mode at any time Features Guide References Day Night Service General Programming 57 2 2 System Programming 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Description Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis when automatic day night switching is programmed in programme 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Selection e Day of the week selection number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturda
183. ide parties When the timer expires the outside to outside line call is disconnected Selection Time minutes 1 through 64 Default 10 min Programming 1 Enter 206 Display 206 CO CO TIME 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Call Forwarding Call Transfer Conference Direct Inward System Access DISA 132 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 207 First Digit Time Description Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of an outside dial tone and the first digit dialled on an outgoing outside call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency receiver is released Selection Time seconds 5 through 120 Default 10s Programming 1 Enter 207 Display 207 1ST DIGIT T 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Toll Restriction General Programming 133 2 3 Timer Programming 208 Inter Digit Time Description Assigns the maximum time allowed be
184. if Auto automatic is selected in programme 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode e Lunch Break service ends at the assigned time For example If Lunch is 3 00 4 00 PM Day mode starts at 4 01 PM If Lunch is 3 00 3 59 PM Day mode starts at 4 00 PM Features Guide References Day Night Service General Programming 123 2 2 System Programming 152 Charge Verification Assignment Description Assigns the extension which is allowed to refer or clear for the call information on the extension outside line account code and the total Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X all jacks e Enable Disable Default All jacks Enable Programming 1 Enter 152 Display 152 CHARGE REF 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the slave 1f available e To assign all jack numbers to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference 1
185. igits Default All groups Blank Programming 1 Enter 620 Display 620 LUN BRK EXT 2 Press NEXT Display Group NO 3 Enter a group number To enter group number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 1 4 Enter the desired extension number To change the current entry enter the new number Display example 1 1 101 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e This programming can only be used if DIL1 1 for lunch break group is set e ISDN extensions phantom extensions floating numbers and voice mail extensions cannot be assigned to a lunch break group Features Guide References Day Night Service General Programming 259 2 7 Extension Programming 621 Cordless PT Extension Port Description Prevents the cordless proprietary telephone speakerphone functions from working in the following cases if connected to extension ports such as KX T7890 a BGM start or end the BGM b LCS work on the private mode even if the hands free mode is set c A voice calling using a voice calling Only Ring calling can be used d Paging using the paging features Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 X X all jacks e Yes prevent No allow Default All jacks all outside lines No Prog
186. igned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e El channel number 01 through 30 X All El channels e Digit to be received 1 through 7 Default All El channels 4 Programming 1 Enter 744 Display 744 DID RCV DIAL 2 Press NEXT Display CH NO 3 Enter a channel number To enter a channel number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CH01 4 4 Enter a digit To assign no time press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another channel press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired channel number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company e To assign all channels to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for channel 01 Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 361 4 4 El Line Programming 745 El DR2 Receiver Description Sets a dial receiving type to each El channel assigned to DR2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e El channel number 01 through 30 X X All El channels e Dial receiving type Pulse DTMF MFC R2 Undefined Default All El channels Undefined Programming 1 Enter 745 Display 745 DR2 RCV DIAL 2 Press NEXT Display CH NO gt 3 Enter a channel number To enter a channel number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example C
187. ignment for ISDN El Description Assigns your ISDN network or El line telephone number Your ISDN network telephone number is sent to the called party with the CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation feature and to the calling party with the COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation feature offered by the ISDN network service Your El line telephone number is sent to the called party Outgoing AND Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 e Telephone number 16 digits max Default All outside lines Not stored Programming 1 Enter 418 Display 418 CO LINE 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END El Programming 345 4 2 El Outside Line Programming Conditions Each number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available To display parts of the number which have scro
188. igns up to ten area codes which are necessary when using the Caller ID feature By assigning your area code the system records the caller s phone number modified by programmes 126 Caller ID Modification for Local Call and 127 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Call Selection e Location number 01 through 10 e Area code 1 through 6 digits Default All locations Blank Programming 1 Enter 125 Display 125 AREA CODE 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 4 Enter an area code To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new area code 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e The area code can be six digits long Valid numbers are from 0 through 9 e The location numbers used in this programme corresponds to those in programme 126 Caller ID Modification for Local Call Features Guide References Caller ID General Programming 93 2 2 System Programming Call Log Incoming 94 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 126 Caller ID Modification for Local Call Description Assigns removed digits from the received caller s number of a local call and adds number to make the final number which serves as the Caller ID nu
189. ine number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Some central offices CO may send CPC like signals during the dialling sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated If your CO is such a type select Disable e Programme 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set is used to set CPC Signal Detection Time General Programming 193 2 5 Outside Line Programming e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave 1f available e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Direct Inward System Access DISA 194 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment Description Enables or disables Reverse Circuit detection This programme is only available for the following models KX TD816BX HK KX TD1232DBX ML TDN1232 Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all out
190. ing END To go to the next larger programme address do not press END but press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME V or rorate the Jog Dial in the counter clockwise direction To go to the next smaller programme address do not press END but press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME A or rorate the Jog Dial in the counter clockwise direction 18 Tells you what you should notice or consider when doing the programming 19 Lists all of the features related to the System Speed Dialling programming These features are described in the Features Guide Programming Structure Programme Programming Group Description Address 0XX Manager Programming These programmes may be accessed by the system manager of the customer to meet frequent changes requested by the customer 1XX System Programming Entire system programming 2XX Timer Programming Flexible system timer setting 3XX TRS ARS TIE Line Assignment of Toll Restriction Automatic Route Routing Table Programming Selection ARS or TIE Line Routing Table 4XX Outside Line ISDN Line Setting of outside line outside line group ISDN line TIE Line Programming or TIE line values 5XX COS Programming Setting of Class of Service COS 6XX Extension Programming Setting of extension values 7XX El Line Programming Setting of El line values 24 Programming Instructions 1 6 Programming Example Programming Structure Programm
191. irectory digital display proprietary telephone 1 numbers except for KX T7230 in Station Speed Dialling 10 Determines the source of Music Source 0 internal music 0 e BGM 1 for Music on Hold and BGM source e Music on Hold 1 external music source 12 11 Selects inter digit pause for pulse 00 630 ms 01 None dialling 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 13 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 14 Sets the extension hooking signal 0 84 1000 ms 1 None detection time 1 204 1000 ms 15 16 Reserved Optional Programming 407 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 03 1 16 These bits are provided to assign PAD 0 0dB 0 None 04 1 8 Switch Control volume control of 1 3 dB received calls on an outside line This can be assigned for each outside line The bits 1 through 16 in Area 03 correspond to outside lines 1 through 16 and the bits 1 through 8 in Area 04 correspond to outside lines 17 through 24 The outside lines 9 through 24 are only available for KX TD1232 9 Prevents or allows a call originated by 0 prevent 1 Voice Mail an AA port of VPS to another AA port 1 allow Integration for Inband 10 Prevents or allows sending pulse 0 prevent 1 None dialling signals during an outside call 1 allow 11 12 Reserved 13 Enab
192. isables sending outside line 0 enable 1 E amp M TIE access number 9 0 to a TIE line When 1 disable Line Service you dial outside line access number 9 0 and the outside line is busy the system can automatically send outside line access number 9 0 to a TIE line so that you can access the outside line through another PBX 5 Determines whether to printout the last 0 first entered 1 Account Code entered or the first entered account code code Entry in the SMDR last entered code 6 When an incoming call is received in a receive 1 None Hunting group Ring UCD Circular not receive Terminate this programme determines whether the extension where the Do Not Disturb feature is set receives the call or not 7 When an incoming call is received in a receive 1 None Hunting group Ring UCD Circular not receive Terminate this programme determines whether the extension where the Call Forwarding feature is set receives the call or not 8 Enables or disables Circular and disable 1 Station Hunting Termination hunting enable 9 10 Reserved 11 Enables or disables the COLP feature enable 1 COLP disable 412 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 06 12 Assigns how the number is changed via 0 The number 0 DDI the ISDN line into an extension number converted in which
193. isplayed For Data 4 through 25 enter the desired parameter To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new parameter To enter decimal point for Data 6 through 25 press x Press STORE To programme another items press NEXT or PREV or SELECT Repeat steps 3 through 5 Press END NHN MW A 296 ISDN Programming 3 2 System Programming Conditions e After this assignment you should reset the system so that this assignment is activated Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN ISDN Programming 297 3 2 System Programming 154 DID Transfer Table for DDI Call Description Selects whether the DID Transfer Table is used for DDI calls Selection Use No Use Default No Use Programming 1 Enter 154 Display 154 DDI TRANS 2 Press NEXT Display example No Use 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDD Direct Inward Dialling DID 298 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 418 Outside Line Number Assignment for ISDN El Description Assigns your ISDN network or El line telephone number Your ISDN network telephone number is sent to the called party with the CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation feature and to the calling party with the CO
194. itions An extension can be assigned as the destination of as many outside lines as required For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods To assign all jacks or all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 or step 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or for outside line 01 There are six notification methods a Immediate ringing rings immediately b 1 ring delay c 3 ring delay d 6 ring delay e No ring only the indicator flashes f Disable no incoming call When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV the outside line number is not changed Example 03 1 CO06 Press NEXT 03 2 CO06 Features Guide References Day Night Service Direct In Lines DIL 248 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night Description Determines the outside lines which can be accessed by an extension in both day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned outside lines Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD 1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first p
195. k number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available General Programming 251 2 7 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e To assign all jacks to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Two doorphones can be installed For the KX TD1232 doorphones 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e You can enter up to two for KX TD816 or four for KX TD1232 doorphone numbers for each extension Features Guide References Door Opener Doorphone Call Day Night Service 252 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 609 Voice Mail Access Codes Description Assigns a mailbox number for each extension only if programme 990 System Additional Information Area 02 bit 8 is set to free Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Mailbox number 16 digits max Default All jacks Not stored Programming 1 Enter 609 Display 609 V MAIL CODES 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To
196. k number Display 01 1 EXT101 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END 34 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX TD816 and 128 extension numbers for KX TD1232 Each extension number can be two three or four digits consisting of 0 through 9 The and keys cannot be used For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave 1f available An extension number is invalid if the first or second digits do not match with the programme 100 Flexible Numbering 01 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks setting If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have two digits and some have three digits If two digits are assigned some have three digits and some have four digits Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack If eXtra Device Port XDP is disabled for the jack in programme 600 EXtra Device Port the extension number of the second part XX 2 is not available XX jack number For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry
197. l CPC Signal Detection Direct Inward System Access DISA 180 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 406 Caller ID Assignment Description Enables the Caller ID feature for the outside lines to which a Caller ID Service is offered by a Central Office by contract Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines Enable Disable Default All outside lines Disable Programming 1 Enter 406 Display 406 CALLER ID CO 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 e The following programmes are used to programme Caller ID feature 110 Caller ID Code Set and 111 Caller ID Name Set General Programming 181 2 5 Outside Line Programming Features Guide References C
198. l numbers 01 02 Jack 03 Voice mail numbers 03 04 Jack 05 Voice mail numbers 05 06 Jack 08 Voice mail numbers 07 08 Jack 11 Voice mail numbers 09 10 Jack 13 Voice mail numbers 11 12 Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 80 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Description Assigns the extension number for the voice mail number These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access This programme is available when this system is connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 Selection e Voice mail number VM KX TD816 01 through 12 KX TD1232 01 through 24 e Extension Number 2 through 4 digits Default KX TD816 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 VM 09 181 VM 10 182 VM 11 183 VM 12 184 KX TD1232 VM 01 165 VM 02 166 VM 03 167 VM 04 168 VM 05 169 VM 06 170 VM 07 177 VM 08 178 VM 09 181 VM 10 182 VM 11 183 VM 12 184 VM 13 171 VM 14 172 VM 15 173 VM 16 174 VM 17 175 VM 18 176 VM 19 179 VM 20 180 VM 21 185 VM 22 186 VM 23 187 VM 24 188 Programming 1 Enter 118 Display 118 VM EXT 2 Press NEXT Display VM NO gt 3 Enter a voice mail number To enter voice mail number 01 you can also press NEXT Display VM
199. layed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Select the standard used by your modem Features Guide References System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer General Programming 279 2 8 Resource Programming 815 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number Description Assigns the DISA Direct Inward System Access built in automated attendant AA number The extension number and the floating number can be assigned as a one digit number and used as a DISA built in automated attendant number Selection e DISA built in automated attendant number 0 through 9 e Extension number Floating number 2 through 4 digits Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 815 Display 815 DISA AA 2 Press NEXT Display example Dial NO 3 Enter a DISA built in automated attendant number To enter DISA AA number 0 you can also press NEXT Display example Dial 0O Disable 4 Enter an extension or floating number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new floating number Display example Dial 0 EXT112 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DISA AA number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DISA AA number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END Conditions This system can store up to ten programmable DISA built in auto attendant numbers Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 280 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming
200. lbox number e Required entries selections LV MSG Leave Message This command is transmitted to a VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port AA SVC Automated Attendant Service If AA Service is effective in programme 990 Area 05 bits 6 and 7 the AA SVC command is sent toa VM port if an incoming outside call is answered by the VM port e Other programming required programme addresses 106 602 609 990 Area 05 bits 6 and 7 990 Area 02 bit 8 2 Hearing the message at the extension If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button indicator of the dialled telephone the telephone user can hear the message by pressing the MESSAGE button e Required entries selections GETMSG Get Message This command is transmitted to a VM port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted preceding the GETMSG command above This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the MESSAGE indicator e Other programming required programme addresses 609 990 Area 02 bit 8 B If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant AA Service An AA port answers an incoming outside call to provide AA services such as call transfer receiving a message e Required entries selections VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted before the LV MSG code if an operator transfers
201. ld be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in programming mode as follows The original functions are in parentheses During Normal Operation During Programming PAUSE PAUSE PROGRAM SP PHONE NEXT REDIAL PREV PREVIOUS AUTO ANSWER MUTE SELECT FLASH FLASH TRANSFER CLEAR FWD DND gt CONF lt a INTERCOM SECRET AUTO DIAL STORE STORE HOLD END 12 Programming Instructions 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the proprietary telephone while in programming mode There are Overlays for the KX T7400 and KX T7200 series telephones KX T7436 and KX T7230 are used for the examples Panasonic x 17 35 Panasonic PROGRAM CLEAR ER E ac STORE 2 ea FLASH SELECT KX T7436 KX T7230 Viewing the Display The display gives you helpful information such as what you should do now what you have done etc The KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 and the KX T7235 utilise two information lines for programming The upper line is called the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line The Message Line upper shows you what you should d
202. les or disables the pulse feedback 0 disable 1 None sound when a dialled number is sent to 1 enable an outside line 14 16 Reserved 408 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 05 1 Reserved 2 Have an option to restrict the DISA 0 10 times 1 DISA outside to outside line extending time 1 no limitation 10 attempts are allowed 3 Enables or disables retry by dialling 0 disable 1 DISA during DISA outside call 1 enable 4 Reserved 5 Sets the time the system waits for IRNA 0 immediately 1 OGM after the OGM 1 after 5 seconds 6 For VM DPT Integration 0 disable 1 Voice Mail Enables or disables sending the Follow 1 enable Integration for On ID when an outside call is routed to a voice mail port by Call Forwarding For VM Inband Integration Enables or disables sending the Follow On ID when an outside call is routed to a voice mail port by Call Forwarding e When the port is in AA service mode enable the mode will change to the VM service mode disable the mode will not be changed e When the port is in VM service mode The Follow On ID is always sent regardless of this programme Digital Proprietary Telephones e Voice Mail Integration for Inband Optional Programming 409 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit D
203. ll hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single CO Group CO or Loop CO Features Guide References Button Flexible Buttons on Proprietary Telephones and Consoles 40 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Description Assigns the jack number for a manager and or operators The manager extension can perform System Programming and manager services The operators have the ability to perform operator services Selection e OPE 1 operator 1 OPE 2 operator 2 MNGER manager Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Default Operator 1 Jack 01 Operator 2 and Manager Not stored Programming 1 Enter 006 Display 006 OP 1 2 MGR 2 Press NEXT to programme operator 1 Display OPE 1 Jack01 To programme another item you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired one is displayed 3 Enter a jack number To assign no operator or manager press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Press STORE To programme another item press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 3 through 5 Press END NN Mm q Conditions e Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave
204. lled off the display press gt or lt lt Outside lines 25 through 54 become available when the KX TD290 or KX TD188 expansion unit is installed in the KX TD1232 Your telephone number will be informed to the called party if the outgoing CLIR feature is disabled for the ISDN line in programme 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment Your telephone number will be informed to the calling party if the COLP feature is enabled for the ISDN line in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 Bit 11 Features Guide References Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR El Line Service Incoming Outside Call Information Display 346 El Programming 4 3 Extension Programming 4 3 Extension Programming 622 Extension ANI Number Description Assigns the identification number of the calling party to utilise the Automatic Number Identification ANI feature provided by the El line service This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Jack number 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part ANI number 16 digits max Default All jacks 1 2 Not stored Programming 1 Enter 622 Display 622 EXT ANI NO 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the ja
205. lling Party Control CPC Signal on incoming outside calls If this is programmed the system disconnects the line when the CPC Signal is detected Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Time milliseconds Disable no detection 100 200 300 400 500 600 Default All outside lines Disable Programming 1 Enter 405 Display 405 CPC INCOMING 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 e You may disable CPC Signal Detection for an outside line General Programming 179 2 5 Outside Line Programming e Programme 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set is used to programme CPC Signal Detection for outgoing outside calls Features Guide References Calling Party Contro
206. mber 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Call Forwarding General Programming 231 2 6 COS Programming 505 Executive Busy Override Description Determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override allows the user to interrupt an established call Selection e COS number 1 through 8 X X all COS e Disable Enable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 505 Display 505 EXEC BSY OR 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Executive Busy Override 232 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 506 Executive Busy Override Deny Description Determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to deny Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Deny allow
207. mber 424 Default Values Programme Default 136 DID DDI Number Assignment All locations Not stored 137 138 DID DDI Extension Day Night All locations Not stored 139 DID DDI Extension Name Set All locations Not stored 141 Charge Rate Decimal Point Assignment 2 142 Charge Rate Assignment All outside lines 0 00 143 Charge Display Selection in Meter 144 Currency Assignment 148 Off Hook Monitor Enable 150 Lunch Service Starting Ending Time Every day of the week 12 00 12 59 PM 151 Break Service Starting Ending Time Every day of the week 3 00 3 29 PM 152 Charge Verification Assignment All jacks Enable 153 Charge Verification ID Code Set 1234 200 Hold Recall Time 60 s 201 Transfer Recall Time 12 rings 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 3 rings 203 Intercept Time 12 rings 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time ls 205 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration 10 min Time 206 Outside to Outside Line Call Duration 10 min Time 207 First Digit Time 10s 208 Inter Digit Time 10s Default Values 425 Programme Default 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times KX TD816BX KX TD1232 D BX ML KX TDN1232 10 times KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK 3 times KX TD1232X 2 times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time KX TD816BX KX TD123
208. mber The system records the modified caller s number to the incoming call log list so that the extension user can call back the caller Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received digits Selection e Location number 01 through 10 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 9 O no deletion e Number to be added 4 digits max Default All locations Deleted number 0 Added number Blank Programming 1 Enter 126 Display 126 CID LOCAL 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Del0 Add 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press m to programme the number to be added if required 6 Enter the number to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another location number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions e The added number has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and General Programming 95 2 2 System Programming e There are ten location numbers for modified numbers which corresponds to those in programme 125 Area Code Assignment Features Guide References Caller ID Call Log Incoming 96 General Programming 2 2 S
209. mber Set All location numbers Not stored 014 VM Name Set All Voice Mails V Mail xx xx 01 through 24 015 Budget Management All jacks 0 017 DISA TIE User Codes All DISA TIE user code numbers DISA TIE user code Blank COS number 8 422 Default Values Programme Default 100 Flexible Numbering See Feature Number List 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Manual 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 00 PM 103 Automatic Access Outside Line Group 12345678 Assignment 105 Account Codes All locations Not stored 106 Station Hunting Type All extension groups Disable 107 System Password 1234 108 Automatic Hold by CO DSS Button DSS button Enable CO button Disable 109 Expansion Unit Type KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C E1 E2 110 Caller ID Code Set All locations Not stored 111 Caller ID Name Set All locations Not stored 113 VM Status DTMF Set RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 114 VM Command DTMF Set LV MSG H GETMSG H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 115 Adjust Time 1 00 AM 116 ROM Version Display Not applicable 117 Voice Mail Number Assignment All jacks Blank Default
210. me 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This programme sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent to an outside line to DTMF mode Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Time milliseconds 80 160 Default All outside lines 80 ms Programming 1 Enter 404 Display 404 DTMF TIME 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example C001 80msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END u Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 The DTMF time required is determined by the outside line or PBX line General Programming 177 2 5 Outside Line Programming Features Guide References Dial Type Selection 178 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set Description Assigns the expected minimum duration of the Ca
211. mme Default 149 ISDN Data Assignment 1 ADPCM Type KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK M Law Others A Law 2 Status Message Send 3 Status Receiving Mode Disc 4 Numbering Type 0 Unknown 5 Numbering Plan 1 ISDN Telephone Numbering Plan 6 T200 Extension Timer 1 0 s 7 T203 Extension Timer 10 0 s 8 T302 Extension Timer 15 0 s 9 T303 Extension Timer 4 0 s 10 T304 Extension Timer 20 0 s 11 T305 Extension Timer 30 0 s 12 T306 Extension Timer 30 0 s 13 T310 Extension Timer 40 0 s 14 T3D3 Extension Timer 30 0 s 15 T3D9 Extension Timer 20 0 s 16 T200 CO Timer 1 0 s 17 T203 CO Timer 10 0 s 18 T302 CO Timer 15 0 s 19 T303 CO Timer 4 0 s 20 T304 CO Timer 30 0 s 21 T305 CO Timer 30 0 s 22 T306 CO Timer 0 0 s 23 T310 CO Timer 100 0 s 24 T3D3 CO Timer 60 0 s 25 T3D9 CO Timer 20 0 s 154 DID Transfer Table for DDI Call No Use 418 Outside Line Number Assignment for ISDN El All outside lines Not stored 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment All outside lines Enable 420 ISDN Ring Service Assignment All outside lines Regular 421 DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment All outside lines Removed digit 0 Added number Not stored 423 ISDN Port Type All ports CO 424 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode KX TD816 Port 05 and 06 Call Other ports
212. mming 1 Enter 802 Display 802 SYSTEM DATA 2 Press NEXT Display Enter Range 3 Enter a printout range number or for All Display Print Out Start 4 Press STORE to start printing Printing starts To stop printing press SELECT and go to step 4 When printing is completed the display shows Display Print Out Finish 5 Press STORE Display Print Out Stop 6 Press END General Programming 265 2 8 Resource Programming Conditions e Itis necessary to connect a printer to the Serial Interface RS 232C port provided on the system e You may stop printing by pressing the END button while records are being printed out e You cannot restart the printout while records are being output Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 266 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 803 Music Source Use Description Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and Background Music BGM Selection Hold BGM e Music source number KX TD816 1 No Use KX TD1232 1 through 4 No Use Default Hold and BGM Music 1 Programming 1 Enter 803 Display 803 MUSIC SOURCE 2 Press NEXT to programme Music on Hold Display example Hold Musicl 3 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme BGM
213. n Speed Dialling 407 STORE button 12 System Additional Information 404 System Data Printout 265 System Password 14 65 System Speed Dialling 30 32 147 System Speed Dialling Name Set 32 System Speed Dialling Number Set 30 Index 44 T Termination hunting 63 412 TIE Added Number 204 TIE First Inter Digit Time 146 TIE Format Number Assignment 198 TIE Incoming Assignment 199 TIE Line Routing Table 165 TIE Modify Removed Digit Added Number 167 TIE Outgoing Assignment 201 TIE Receive Dial 215 TIE Security Type 210 TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit 203 TIE User Codes 51 TIE Wink Time Out Assignment 205 TIE to Outside Transfer 208 TIE to TIE Transfer 209 Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time 143 Toll Restriction 406 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 226 Transfer Recall 406 Transfer Recall Time 127 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 148 TRS Entry Code Assignment for Extra Table 163 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 150 TRS Override for System Speed Dialling 147 Two Way Record button 38 Two Way Transfer button 38 U UCD Uniform Call Distribution 87 89 UCD hunting 63 UCD Overflow 87 UCD Time Table 89 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 87 89 Unit location 67 290 342 Unit Type 67 290 342 User Password 22 85 User Programming 10 22 85 V Verified All Calls mode 235 Verified Toll Restriction Override mode 235 VM Command DTMF Set 75 VM hu
214. n four digits are entered they will not be stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References System Programming with Proprietary Telephone General Programming 85 2 2 System Programming 121 Walking COS Password Description Assigns the password required for Walking COS Selection Password 4 through 7 digits Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 121 Display 121 COS PASSWORD 2 Press NEXT Display example Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The password can be from four through seven digits long Valid numbers are from 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they will not be stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Class of Service COS 86 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 122 UCD Overflow Description Assigns the destination where the call is transferred to when all extensions in the Uniform Call Distribution UCD group are busy The Time Table number of the overflow extension must also be assigned Selection e UCD group number 1 through 8 e Overflow extension number 2 through 4 digits Time Table number 1 through 4 Default All UCD groups Not stored Programming 1 Enter 122 Display 122 UCD OVERFLOW 2 Press NEXT Display UCD NO gt 3 Enter a UCD group number
215. nanrna non nc cnn acns 277 STA Modena Standard tcccceecccsi este A ee 279 815 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number oconnnnnnonunnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnonccnononnnnnnononono 280 816 SMDR Output MOde mii iia 281 817 KX TD197 KX TD198 Baud Rate Set ooonoononnnnnnnnnnononnnonononnnnnnnnncccnnnananonocononannnnss 282 3 ISDN Programming ii OS 3 1 Manager Programming ssceescossosssocsoesssesssesseessoosoossoossoossoossoossosssoessesssesssossoossoosos 284 012 ISDN Extension Number Set coonoonononnccnononononnnonononnnnnonononononnnnnnononononnnnnonnocononannnnss 284 013 ISDN Extension Name Set oein niia ii a a aait 286 Table of Contents 018 Budget Management for ISDN Extensl0N oococononcconnnonnconnnonnnonnnonnccnnnconccnnncnnncnnnc nos 288 SA Au AAA O 290 109 Expansion Unit Types aris a A See ei lens 290 112 ISDN Network Type Assignment 0 cee cee ceeeceeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseecaeeaecsaeesaeesseenes 293 140 DDI Number Phantom Extension Number Conversion c cccccccecsesssecceeeeeees 294 149 ISDN Data ASSIGnMe Nt naenin irose ei e i EE E EE E 295 154 DID Transfer Table for DDI Call oonnoonnnononnncnnnonnnannnnncnononnananonononnonnnannonononcononnns 298 3 3 ISDN Line Programming seessecssessoossoososecooscoscoosecoceooccooesooesooesoosssocooscosseossoosesosesoe 299 418 Outside Line Number Assignment for ISDN El ooooonnncccnnocononacononcnonanccnnnnacana
216. ncnonnos 330 613 AISDN Class o SEVICE catolico a a oceania 331 614 615 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension 333 616 DDI Number ISDN Extension Number Conversion oococcooooconononnnoncnoncnnncnnncnnnnnnnos 335 617 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for Extension cooonoccnnocccnonccononncnnnacnnnnconnnccnnnnos 337 618 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension coooccnncccnonccnonnnnnnononnnncninnnos 339 AAA A D4 L 4 1 System Program viecscsccacsccisoseccsivesssevecsocedsssncsvsstesstesteaccsnasecesceescesvecsecevesesecssevessee 342 109 Expansion Unit Type ccoo ida dida 342 4 2 El Outside Line Programming sccsssssccsssssccsssssccsssscccsssccccssssssscssssscsssessesens 345 418 Outside Line Number Assignment for ISDN El ooooonnncccnnocononocononcninanacnnnnacancninnnoss 299 4 3 Extension Programming scccssscccssssccccssssccesssscccsssscccssssscccsssscscsssccsscessesscsssecees 347 622 Extension ANI Number sneri aa ea iera ET ETEK E 347 4 4 El Line Programming ssoessssoocssooesssoosssooecesossesoocssoossssoosesscosssoossesoosssoosessosessoossses 349 OZI EIsClock Modei Tanne tt E La a 349 720 EL TIE Ringing Servicenet n riaa A a ER T eles dd ed E eee o 350 721 PREFEl Reference CO aaa a a aae ae a Eaa aee La E 326 722 El Answer Wat TIME iia A o 353 723 EM Sending TIE Caller UD tii td 354 740 El Channel Assignment 00 ccce
217. nected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 380 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 765 El E amp M Pulse Length Clear Description Sets a pulse length when clearing an El line assigned to E amp M This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time milliseconds 150 600 Default 600 ms Programming 1 Enter 765 Display 765 CLEAR 2 Press NEXT Display example Clear 600msec 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 381 4 4 El Line Programming 766 El Meter Pulse Detection Mode Description Sets the charge meter pulse detection mode for the El line assigned to DR2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection No Detection Outgoing Only Both Calls Default No Detection Programming 1 Enter 766 Display 766 METER DETECT 2 Press NEXT Display example No Detection 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 382 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 767 El Meter Pulse Detection Bit Position Description Sets a bit positi
218. neral Programming 225 2 6 COS Programming 2 6 COS Programming 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night Description Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service COS These programmes set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night mode Selection COS number 1 through 8 X all COS Level number 1 through 8 Default COS 1 through 7 Level 1 Day Night COS 8 Level 7 Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 500 for day or 501 for night Display example 500 TRS DAY LVL 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 1 4 Enter a level number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 226 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming Features Guide References Day Night Service Toll Restriction General Programming 227 2 6 COS Programming 502 Extension to Outside Line Call Duration Limit Description Allows you to restrict the duration of outside calls on a Class of Service COS basis Selection COS number 1 through 8
219. ng 781 El Group II Description Assigns a signal type for Group II parameters on the El line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Parameter number 01 through 15 e Signal type Undefined Subscriber Operator Collect Call Default Parameter 02 Subscriber Other parameters Undefined Programming 1 Enter 781 Display 781 GROUP II 2 Press NEXT Display Parameter NO gt 3 Enter a parameter number To enter a parameter number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Undefined 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another parameter press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired parameter number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 397 4 4 El Line Programming 782 El Group A Description Assigns a signal code for Group A parameters on the El line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Parameter number 01 Address Complete 02 ANI Request 03 Set UP Speech 04 First Request 05 N Request 06 N 1 Request 07 N 2 Request 08 N 3 Request e Signal code 00 through 15 00 Undefined Default Parameter 01 03 Parameter 02 05 Parameter 03 06 Oth
220. ng Conditions e To assign all outside lines to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 25 Features Guide References El Line Service Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 332 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 722 El Answer Wait Timer Description Assigns an automatic disconnect timer to stop making a call on El line if the called party does not answer This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Outside CO line number 25 through 54 X all outside lines from 25 to 54 e Time minutes 0 1 2 3 4 O no disconnection Default All outside lines 1 min Programming 1 Enter 722 Display 722 ANSWER WAIT 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter an outside line number 25 you can also press NEXT Display example CO Line NO gt 25 4 Press NEXT Display example CO25 1min 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 353 4 4 El Line Programming 723 El Sending TIE Caller ID Description Sends a Caller ID on the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency si
221. ng 1 Enter 446 Display 446 BACKWARD TM 2 Press NEXT Display Format NO 3 Enter a DID format number To enter DID format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 15 sec 4 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DID format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty e To assign all DID formats to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID format number 1 Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID General Programming 217 2 5 Outside Line Programming 447 DID Disappearance Timer for MFC R2 Description Assigns the length of waiting time of the stop signal from your central office Selection DID format number 1 through 8 X X all DID formats e Time seconds 1 through 30 Default All DID formats 24 s Programming 1 Enter 447 Display 447 DISAPPEAR 2 Press NEXT Display Format NO 3 Enter a DID format number To enter DID format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 24 sec 4 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DID format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID fo
222. ng is not desired select Disable in step 4 e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Day Night Service General Programming 59 2 2 System Programming 103 Automatic Access Outside Line Group Assignment Description Assigns the sequence in which outside line groups will be accessed when in Automatic Line Access mode When a user dials the feature number for automatic line access default 9 0 or presses the Loop CO button an idle line is searched for in the programmed outside line group order Selection Outside line group number 1 through 8 in desired order Default 12345678 Programming 1 Enter 103 Display 103 AUTO CO GRP 2 Press NEXT Display example Access 12345678 3 Enter the outside line group numbers in priority from top to bottom To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new order Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e The system supports a maximum of eight outside line groups e Automatic Line Access feature works only if the Automatic Route Selection mode is turned off in programme 312 ARS Mode Features Guide References Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line Outside Line Access 60 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 105 Account Codes Description Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry Verified All Calls and Verified Toll
223. nge the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE The indicator lights red and a confirmation tone lets you know that storage is completed Programming Instructions 23 1 6 Programming Example Sample of Description Explanation 6 To programme another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 9 8 Press END Conditions T I I i 1 l i 1 1 I i I j i 1 l 1 1 e Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 l and keys FLASH PAUSE SECRET l and hyphen buttons i i i I I i 1 l 1 l l i I I I i i 1 i 1 1 1 I I 1 l 1 1 1 l l 19 Features Guide References 15 Select the best way for you to store another speed dial number Pressing the NEXT PREV allows you to select the next higher lower speed dial number You can also keep pressing them until the desired one is displayed If you press SELECT and the desired speed dial number the selected code is displayed 16 You can continue to programme another entry 17 After you have stored all your entries finish this programme by pressing END After pressing END you can go to any programme address you desire You can return to the Initial Message mode any time by press
224. nonnnoss 299 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment eeeeeeeeseseeeseeseerresterrrsresresressesresrs 301 420 ISDN Ring Service Assignment eseeeeeeseseeeeesresteerrsserresteestrrisseesesresressrsresresstse 303 421 DDI Removed Digit Added Number AssignhMent oocconncnnnnnnonnnoncnonnconaconacnnncnnnanncs 305 4231 ISDN PortlY pere isa a Se ete eee ns t 307 424 ISDN Layer 1 Active MOE Seinien icono conan E soc a Rie 309 425 ISDN Configura csi ind deena ames ele 311 4261 ISDN Data Link Mode seo at ccs asda a vcasstoveste dcoccbdavaetecedesuoasteater Aaea 313 427 ISDN TELM d iier dd eee 315 428 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number 00 cccccecsceceececeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeesaes 317 429 ISDN Extension Progress Tone 0 cccccecssccceneeceeeeecseeeesecceeaceceaeeeesaeeenaaeceeaeeeeeeens 319 454 MSNIASSISMIMENE acosta irten e a eie E EE ibi iras 321 455 456 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN eee eee eens 323 460 PRI Configuration onore nean o i E ena aE cava cas teh an did ana 325 720 iv PRIVET Reference Ossa a i e a cca e E a a E tia acord Dai 326 3 4 Extension Programming soesssooecsooesssoosssooscssossesoosssooosessossssoosescossssoosssoossssossssoosesee 328 611 DDI Number Extension Number CoNVersSlON ooccccccnnnonnnonnnononononananancnnconnonananannnos 328 612 DDI Number Floating Number Conversion ccococccccocncnnonncnonccnonononananonnnccnnncona
225. ns To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References TIE Line Service 212 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 442 Voice Level Transmit Description Assigns the transmitted voice level on an outside line port basis This programme is valid only when the voice path type is set to 4 wire Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines e 6db 3db 0 db 3 db Default All outside lines 3 db Programming 1 Enter 442 Display 442 V LEVEL TX 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 09 you can also press NEXT Display example CO009 3db 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 Press END Conditions To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 Features Guide References TIE Line Service General Programming 213 2 5 Outside Line Programming 443 Voice Level Receive Description Assigns the received voice level on an outside line basis This programme is valid only when the voice path type is set to 4 wire Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 09 through 12 Master 21 through 24 Slave X all outside lines 6db 3db
226. nting 63 VM Name Set 48 VM Service 75 VM Status DTMF Set 73 Voice Level Receive 214 Voice Level Transmit 213 Voice Mail VM Service 75 Voice Mail Access Codes 253 407 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment 83 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 81 Voice Mail Number Assignment 79 Voice Mail Transfer button 38 Voice Path Type 212 Voice Processing System VPS 73 75 405 407 VOLUME button 16 VPS Voice Processing System 73 75 405 407 W Walking COS Password 86 Whisper OHCA 414 X XDP EXtra Device Port 15 35 42 44 241 442 Index Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd KME Under the applicable copyright laws this manual may not be reproduced in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of KME 2000 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan PSQX2112ZA SO600MTO
227. number To enter DID TIE format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Wink 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 6 To programme another DID TIE format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID TIE format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END u Conditions e The time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal can be programmed in programme 435 DID TIE Wink Time Out Assignment The system disconnects the outside line when the time out time expires e To assign all DID TIE formats to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID TIE format number 1 General Programming 201 2 5 Outside Line Programming Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID El Line Service TIE Line Service 202 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 433 DID TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit Description Assigns the removed digits of received a DID and TIE subscriber number for each DID TIE format In this case digits are removed from the beginning of the received digits Selection e DID TIE format number 1 through 8 e Number of digits to be deleted RMV 0 through 6 O no deletion Default All DID TIE formats RMV 0 Programming 1 Enter 433 Display 433 REMOVE DIAL 2 Press NEXT Display Format NO gt 3 Enter a DI
228. number 24 digits max e While programming use the overlay T I i f t i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l l l 1 l 1 1 I l l 1 l 1 1 1 Default e Before starting to programme enter the All speed dial numbers Not stored programming mode See Entering the programming mode in Section 1 2 Using I I I I I l l l l l I I I j j j l 1 l I l I I j I j j j I l I l 1 I I I j I j j 1 1 Proprietary Telephones Programming D 7 Enter the programme address 1 Enter 001 8 8 The display shows the programme title If your Display SPD Number Set telephone has soft buttons the lower line shows 2 Press NEXT the functions that are currently assigned to them 10 Display SPD Code 9 Press either Soft 3 NEXT shown on the display 3 Enter a speed dial number or the NEXT shown on the overlay 10 The message line advises you to enter a speed dial To enter speed dial number 000 number you can also press NEXT 11 If the telephone number has already been stored the number is displayed a1 Display example 000 Not Stored 12 4 Enter a telephone number 12 Enter the telephone number that you want to store Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits 13 Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry 14 Your entry is now stored To delete the current entry press CLEAR To cha
229. o enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 0 4 Enter the digit s to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press gt Display example CO01 3 6 Enter the number s to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 8 Press STORE 9 Press END ISDN Programming 305 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave 1f available e Each added number has a maximum of four digits consisting of 0 through 9 e To assign all outside lines to the same number press the X key in step 3 In this case the display will show the contents programmed for outside line 01 Example If the removed digits are assigned as 6 and the added number is assigned as 2 the number sent from the network will be changed as follows 85492603 Six digits are deleted and 2 is added and the number becomes 203 e This programme becomes available when the programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 bit 12 is assigned to use this programme Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDI 306 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 423 ISDN Port Type Description Assign
230. o or what you should select It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered The display capacity is 16 digits If your entry exceeds the capacity you can shift the display by pressing or lt button The Function Line lower shows the current function of the soft buttons These functions change with the programming procedures SYS PGM NOP gt lt Message Line CLR NEXT Function Line 2 Line Display Pe 3 ta li Message Line SYS PGM NO gt lt Message Line CLR NEXT lt Function Line CLR NEXT lt Function Line 3 Line Display 6 Line Display Programming Instructions 13 1 2 Using Proprietary Telephones Before entering the programming mode Before entering programming mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook e No calls are on hold at your telephone Entering the programming mode Press PROGRAM or PAUSE x and enter your System Password default 1234 e The display shows the Initial Message SYG PGM NO gt If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button substitute it with the PAUSE button e If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM or PAUSE button is pressed it is cancelled e The System Password entered is not shown on the display The System Password can be changed by System Programming Refer to Section 2 2 107 System Password e During the programming mode your extension is t
231. o press NEXT Display example CO0O1 0 00 4 Enter a charge rate To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new rate To enter a decimal point press the X key 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 outside lines 01 through 12 are for the Master System and outside lines 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all outside lines to the same selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 General Programming 115 2 2 System Programming A maximum of ten digits consisting of 0 through 9 and decimal point can be assigned as the rate The number of spaces depends on the assignment in programme 141 Charge Rate Decimal Point Assignment lt Example gt To assign the rate 0 25 when the decimal place is 3 assigned in 141 enter 0 250 Features Guide References Charge Fee Reference 116 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 143 Charge Display Selection Description Assigns the initial display format of charge fee Selection in Meter in Charge Default in Meter Programming 1 Enter 143 Display 143 CHARGE METER 2 Press NEXT Display example in Meter 3 Keep pressing
232. o programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of 20 special carrier numbers Each carrier number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and You can also use the PAUSE button to enter a wild card character It will be displayed as X Features Guide References Pause Insertion Automatic Toll Restriction 152 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 312 ARS Mode Description Allows you to turn on or off the Automatic Route Selection ARS mode ARS if enabled selects the least expensive route to be used for an outside call Selection On Off Default Off Programming 1 Enter 312 Display 312 ARS MODE SET 2 Press NEXT Display example ARS Off Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END Ge u Conditions e If Off is selected the Automatic Line Access feature functions instead of ARS e Programmes 313 through 331 are used to programme ARS Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS Outside Line Access General Programming 153 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 313 ARS Time Description Assigns times for the four Automatic Route Selection ARS time schedules It is possible to split a day into four time zones maximum so that the least expensive line is selected for t
233. ogramming 108 Automatic Hold by CO DSS Button Description Enables or disables automatically holding an outside call when a DSS Direct Station Selection button on the console or proprietary telephone or a CO button on a proprietary telephone is pressed Through this assignment each button acts as follows Pressing the DSS button holds an outside call and quickly transfers itto an extension without pressing the TRANSFER button Pressing another CO button holds the current outside call Selection e Button DSS or CO Enable Disable Default DSS button Enable CO button Disable Programming 1 Enter 108 Display 108 AUTO HOLD 2 Press NEXT to programme the DSS button Display example DSS XFER Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press NEXT to programme the CO button Display example CO Hold Disable 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 7 Press END SN Conditions This assignment applies to all DSS and CO buttons on all consoles and proprietary telephones in the system Features Guide References Call Hold Call Transfer 66 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 C 4
234. ombination Table b a Press 6 M belongs to 6 b Rotate the Jog Dial one pulse e Rotating the Jog Dial an appropriate number of pulses gives you the desired letter Rotating the Jog Dial two pulses gives the letter m rotating three pulses gives N and so on OR a Press any dialling keypad b Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired character appears e Ifyou keep rotating the Jog Dial all of the characters will be displayed For example if you rotate the Jog Dial after pressing 2 characters will appear in the following order A a B b Z z space lt gt amp O AAaB b ee Example of entering characters to enter Mike Using method 1 See Combination Table a a Enter 6 6 M N O b Press Soft 1 M M M N O c Enter 4 M4 G H i d Press SHIFT M4 g h i e Press Soft 3 i Mi g h aL Programming Instructions 19 1 4 Entering Characters f Enter 5 Mi5 j k 1 g Press Soft 2 k Mik 4 k 1 h Enter 3 Mik3 d e E i Press Soft 2 e Mike d e ie Using method 2 See Combination Table a Procedures The display shows 1 Enter 6 6 2 Press SELECT M 3 Enter 4 M4 4 Press SELECT six times Mi 5 Enter 5 Mi5 6 Press SELECT four times Mik 7 Enter 3 Mik3 8 Press SELECT four times Mike Using m
235. on for charge meter pulse detection on the El line assigned to DR2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection A bit B bit C bit D bit Default B bit Programming 1 Enter 767 Display 767 METER BIT 2 Press NEXT Display example Meter Bit B bit 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 383 4 4 El Line Programming 768 El Meter Pulse Detection Length Description Sets a length of charge meter pulse detection on the El line assigned to DR2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Time milliseconds 01 through 60 X 8 is the actual time Default 16 Programming 1 Enter 768 Display 768 METER LENGTH 2 Press NEXT Display example Meter Length 16 3 Enter a number for an answering detection time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 384 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 769 El DSP Gain DTMF Transmit Description Assigns a DTMF transmitting level from DSP on the El line This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection Level 01 through 16 Default 03 Programming 1 Enter 769 Display 769 DTMF TX DSP 2
236. one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to programme 100 Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks e Floating numbers and extension numbers should be different Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and General Programming 277 2 8 Resource Programming 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 101 through 116 201 through 216 KX TD1232 101 through 164 201 through 264 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 118 VM Extension Number Set KX TD816 165 through 178 181 through 184 KX TD1232 165 through 188 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Not stored You cannot leave an entry empty Floating numbers of extension groups are available for the Uniform Call Distribution UCD and Ring Group features Features Guide References Floating Station 278 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 814 Modem Standard Description Assigns the modem standard There are two standards available BELL and CCITT Selection BELL CCITT Default CCITT Programming 1 Enter 814 Display 814 MODEM TYPE 2 Press NEXT Display example MODEM CCITT 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is disp
237. only Selection Time seconds 01 through 30 Default 24s Programming 1 Enter 779 Display 779 DISAPPEAR 2 Press NEXT Display example Disappear 24 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service El Programming 395 4 4 El Line Programming 780 El Group I Description Assigns a signal code for Group I parameters on the El line assigned to MFC R2 This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e Parameter number 01 ANI Start 02 ANI Complete 03 ANI Reject e Signal code 00 through 15 00 Undefine Default Parameter 01 14 Parameter 02 15 Parameter 03 12 Programming 1 Enter 780 Display 780 GROUP I 2 Press NEXT Display Parameter NO gt 3 Enter a parameter number To enter a parameter number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 14 4 Enter the signal code To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another parameter press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired parameter number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company Features Guide References El Line Service 396 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programmi
238. onononnnnnnnnocononnnnnnnnnncnonannnnnnnos 91 125 Arca Code AssignMe nt eene eriten tipifica orita 93 126 Caller ID Modification for Local Call o ooooococccnnnnonanonaoncnnconnnanonnnnncnnonnona nono nanncnono 95 127 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Call ooonnnccnnicininncanicccononacononcconnccnnnnnonnos 97 P28 EBA COG irc a E A a Ta iS A a ident 98 129 E amp M Signal Assignment onserer iiien i aE E E E A 99 130 Message Waiting Control eee cesceceesseeesecsseceseeseeseeeseneeeaeesaecaeceeesseeseaeenaeenaeens 100 131 Message Waiting Lamp Assignment seesseeesseereseeeressrsrrsstsresressresrestesresseeresreeeee 102 132 Message Waiting Port Seti nt Ad 104 134 Hotel Applications dit ape 106 135 DID Number Conversion Selection ccccnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnononoconananoncnonnonocnonanononnn os 107 136 DID DDI Number Assignment cece cceccecsecceeeeceneeceseeeeeceeaaeseaaeceeeeceeeeeesas 108 137 138 DID DDI Extension Day Night ee eeeesseceteeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseaes 110 139 DID DDI Extension Name Set cooooocooccnnnonoonnnonccnnonannonononononnnnnnonocononanononnnonananannnss 112 141 Charge Rate Decimal Point Assignment eee esceeeeeesceceseceseceeeeeeesaeeneeeeeeenes 114 142 Charge Rate Assisnment onsen ita diodes 115 143 Charge Display Selection cee ceeeesseessecsseceseeseeseeeeseecsaecseecaeceeesseeeeeeeaaessaeees 117 144 Currency ASIN Mebdii nities dia aa it
239. oonnnnnnnninnnncnnnnnnnnnanannnnnanannananarnano 228 503 Call Transfer to Outside LinN coccccccnonininoninininincnnananananananononcnnnnnononnonononcnnnnonononos 230 504 Call Forwarding to Outside Line ooncccnnnccnnncnnnocccnnnnononncnoncccnnnnononcnonn na nnnn cc cnnnccnnnos 231 505 Executive Busy Override nsore A E O E E aaa 232 506 Executive Busy Override Dey ooooonocccnccnoccnonononoconaconaconnnan ccoo non no cono cnnnnnnnranccnnccnnn ns 233 507 Do Not Disturb Override ccccccccccncconinoninoninininincnnanananananonononenononencn nono nononnnnnnnnnnos 234 508 Account Code Entry Modere i a E EEE EEE E E E 235 509 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA ccnooocccconocnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnon 237 S10 Night Service ACCESS ic AA Aa 238 Sit PT Programming Levels eri eree et manesi ae i n 239 2 7 Extension Programming eesssooesscossssoosssoossssosessoocsssoosessossssooessoossssooeesoosessosessoossssoo 241 6001 EXtra Device Point E cacao E E eB orvenceaahusvuveheabastdekesabeberanerts 241 LOOL Classtob Service cid A a o a aed tee 243 602 Extension Group ASsignMent ccccccccceececeseceeeeceececescecceseeeeseeesaeseaaeceeaeeeteeeeses 245 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 247 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night eee 249 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night oooonnccnnncnnnnnonccnoc
240. our entry is not valid Making another selection within the same programme address To make the next higher selection press NEXT To make the previous selection press PREV To make a specific selection press SELECT and then enter the number Programming Instructions 15 1 3 Programming Methods Going to another programme address After pressing STORE you can go to another programme with either of the following two methods a To go to the next larger programme address Press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME V DOWN or rotate the Jog Dial in the counter clockwise direction To go to the next smaller programme address Press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME A UP or rotate the Jog Dial in the clockwise direction b To go to a specific programme address Press END then enter the programme Address Method 1 is useful when you want to perform a series of programmes consecutively For example to change the programming in addresses 0XX use this method You can move from 000 to 001 from 001 to 002 and so on by pressing the SKP or VOLUME V You can move in reverse order from 008 to 007 etc by pressing the SKP or VOLUMEA This method can also be used to move between neighboring programme groups For example you can move between the programme addresses of the largest OXX and 100 the largest 1XX and 200 and so on Also you can move between the smallest programme address 000 and the largest one 9XX Me
241. outside line The bits 4 3 2 and 1 shown below is used to enter your selection 2 Enables or disables Call Forwarding Follow Me feature on a COS basis The bit 5 below is used to enter your selection Display Example Bit Number 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 41 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 0 0 0OJO unused 2 1 Selection COS number 1 through 8 X all COS e Selection for bits 4 3 2 and 1 0000 no limit 0001 1 digit 0010 2 digits 0011 3 digits 0100 4 digits 0101 5 digits 0110 6 digits 0111 7 digits 1000 8 digits 1001 9 digits 1010 10 digits 1011 11 digits 1100 12 digits 1101 13 digits 1110 14 digits 1111 15 digits e Selection for bit 5 0 disable 1 enable Default Bits 4 3 2 and 1 All COS 0000 Bit 5 All COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 991 Display 991 COS ADD DATA 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number Display example 1111111111110000 4 Keep pressing m gt or lt to move the cursor to the desired bit 418 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection 6 To programme another bit repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press STORE 8 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 To programme another COS press SELECT and the desired COS number 10 Pres
242. ows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or outside line 01 e To assign no outside line for an extension press CLEAR in step 4 Features Guide References Day Night Service Outside Line Connection Assignment Outgoing 250 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Description These programmes assign the extensions which will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes Programmed extensions are also allowed to open the door Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 X KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Doorphone number KX TD816 1 and 2 two entries max KX TD1232 1 through 4 four entries max Default Jack 01 1 All doorphones Other jacks no doorphone Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 607 for day or 608 for night Display example 607 DOOR SET DAY 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 1234 4 Enter the doorphone numbers To assign no doorphone press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new doorphone numbers 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jac
243. personal computer Selection e New line code CR LF CR CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed e Baud rate baud 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 e Word length bits 7 8 e Parity bit None Mark Space Even Odd e Stop bit length bits 1 2 Default Port 1 Port 2 New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity bit Mark Stop bit 1 Programming 1 Enter a programme address 806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2 Display example 806 RS232C PORT 1 2 Press NEXT to programme new line code Display example NL Code CR LF 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press NEXT to programme baud rate na A 272 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming Display example Baud Rate 9600 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press NEXT to programme word length Display example Word Lengt 8bits 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT to programme parity bit Display example Parity Mark 12 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 13 Press STORE 14 Press NEXT to programme stop bit Display example Stop Bit 1lbit 15 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 16 Press STORE 17 Press END Conditions e The following combinations are invalid Parity Word Lengt
244. phone number 3 Message Waiting None 3 Another Extension Message Waiting 2 through 4 digits Another extension number 3 Phantom Extension Message Waiting 2 through 4 digits Phantom extension number 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 70 Conference None 71 Log In Log Out None 72 Phantom Extension 2 through 4 digits Phantom extension number 73 Night None 8 Voice Mail Transfer 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 90 Two Way Record 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 91 Two Way Transfer 2 through 4 digits Voice mail extension number 92 Live Call Screening None 93 Live Call Screening Cancel None Loop CO None Group CO 1 through 8 Outside line group number 38 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming Button Code Parameter CO Ringer frequency 1 through 8 Ring tone type number Available when this system is connected to a Voice Processing System which supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 Default KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 Other CO buttons Not stored KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 Programming 1 Enter 005 Display 005 FLEXIBLE CO Press NEX
245. programme ringback tone status To programme another status keep pressing NEXT until the desired status is displayed General Programming 73 2 2 System Programming Display example RBT 1 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed Repeat steps 3 through 5 Press END Conditions A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and PAUSE The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that is assigned as VM or AA in programme 106 Station Hunting Type Features Guide References Voice Mail Integration for Inband 74 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 114 VM Command DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency command signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS There are four commands available Leave Message Get Message Automated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service These commands are used in the following ways A If your VPS is used for Voice Mail VM Service 1 Call Forwarding Intercept Routing to Voice Mail If a call is forwarded to the VPS your system will send a mailbox number to the VM port This allows the caller to leave a message without knowing the mai
246. ps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e Each DDI number can be a maximum of six digits consisting of 0 through 9 e To use this programme DDI conversion number must be selected in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 bit 13 Features Guide References Direct Dialling In DDI 330 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 613 ISDN Class of Service Description Programmes a Class of Service COS number for each ISDN extension port The COS determines the call handling abilities of each port Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports e COS number 1 through 8 Default All ports COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 613 Display 613 ISDN COS 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 COS1 4 Enter a COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services Each ISDN extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming for programmes 5XX and 991 bit 5
247. r another jack number Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number Press STORE Press NEXT to programme another jack number SDN uu A Display example Mast2 oo Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter another jack number 9 Press STORE General Programming 79 2 2 System Programming 10 Press END KX TD1232 1 Enter 117 Display 117 VMS PORT ASN 2 Press NEXT to programme the Master System Display example Mastl 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Press m to enter another jack number Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number Press STORE Press NEXT to programme another jack number NSN Mm A Display example Mast2 8 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter another jack number 9 Press STORE 10 Press NEXT to programme the Slave System Display example Slavl 11 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter another jack number 12 Press STORE 13 Press NEXT to programme another jack number Display example Slav2 14 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter other jack numbers 15 Press STORE 16 Press END Conditions e Neither jack number 01 nor the manager extension can be assigned as a voice mail port jack e The jack numbers correspond to the voice mail port in numerical order Example Stored jack numbers Jacks 02 03 05 08 11 13 Jack 02 Voice mai
248. r assigning this programme the following programme data will become available for PRI outside lines 25 through 54 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment 420 ISDN Ring Service Assignment 421 DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night 614 615 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension After assigning this programme the following programme data will become available for El outside lines 25 through 54 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 457 458 DIL 1 1 Lunch Break Group 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night This programme is only available for the KX TD1232 with the Primary Rate Interface ISDN Expansion Unit KX TD290 or with the E1 Unit KX TD188 Selection Default PRI E1 outside line CO number 25 through 54 X X all outside lines Outside line CO number 01 through 24 All outside lines PRI El line CO 09 Programming 1 Enter 721 Display 721 REFERENCE CO 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter the PRI E1 outside line number Display example CO25 09 4 Enter the desired outside line number 5 Press STORE El Programming 351 4 4 El Line Programmi
249. ramming 1 Enter a 621 Display 621 CORDLESS EXT 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 No 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 7 8 Press END 260 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming Conditions e If Yes is selected for a jack for wired proprietary telephone the speakerphone functions written in the description do not work Connect a cordless proprietary telephone if Yes is selected Features Guide References None General Programming 261 2 8 Resource Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout Description Used to determine which calls will produce a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printout Selection e Outgoing calls All all calls Toll toll calls only Off no printing e Incoming calls On all calls Off no printing Default Outgoing calls All Incoming calls On Programming 1 Enter 800 Display 800 SMDR IN OUT 2 Press NEXT to programme outgoing calls Display Outgoing All 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme incoming calls Display Incoming On 6 Keep pre
250. ramming 183 2 5 Outside Line Programming To assign all outside lines to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 If an outside line is also programmed for DIL 1 N in programmes 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line Assignable extension numbers are programmed in the following programmes Extension numbers 003 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Voice Mail extension numbers 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set Phantom extension numbers 124 Phantom Extension Number Set Floating numbers 813 Floating Number Assignment Features Guide References Direct In Lines DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Day Night Service 184 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night Description Intercept Routing provides an automatic re direction of calls which cannot or have not been answered IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer These programmes set the destination in both day and night modes for each outside line group Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X all outside line groups e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing Default All outside line groups Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme
251. ramming 215 2 5 Outside Line Programming 445 DID Forward Timer for MFC R2 Description Assigns the length of waiting time of the incoming Direct Inward Dialling DID call forward signal from your central office Selection e DID format number 1 through 8 X all DID formats e Time seconds 1 through 30 Default All DID formats 15 s Programming 1 Enter 445 Display 445 FWD TIMER 2 Press NEXT Display Format NO 3 Enter a DID format number To enter DID format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 15 sec 4 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DID format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty e To assign all DID formats to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID format number 1 Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID 216 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 446 DID Backward Timer for MFC R2 Description Assigns the length of waiting time of the outgoing outside call backward signal from your central office Selection e DID format number 1 through 8 X all DID formats e Time seconds 1 through 30 Default All DID formats 15 s Programmi
252. re Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the call Selection Enable Disable Default Enable Programming 1 Enter 810 Display 810 DISA TONE 2 Press NEXT Display example Tone DTC Enable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA General Programming 275 2 8 Resource Programming 812 DISA DTMF Repeat Description Selects whether the system transmits DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals directly to the central office CO or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to CO in order to adjust gain This can be done for an outside to outside line call via the Direct Inward System Access DISA feature during dialling and or during an established call Selection e Dial during dialling Call during an established call e Mode Repeat Through Default Dial and Call Repeat Programming 1 Enter 812 Display 812 DISA DTMF 2 Press NEXT to programme the mode during dialling To programme the mode during an established call press NEXT again Display example Dial Repeat 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme the mode during an established call Display example Call Repeat 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE
253. reated as a busy extension e Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 14 Programming Instructions 1 3 Programming Methods 1 3 Programming Methods Advancing to the next stage When SYS PGM NO is displayed you can select one of the following e To go to programme 000 press the NEXT button e To go to another programme enter the 3 digit programme address Rotation of jack number Each jack of the Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone and a single line device with different extension numbers eXtra Device Port XDP function To programme this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack The first part of jack one is 01 1 The second part of jack one is 01 2 The first part of jack two is 02 1 and so on The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as required Example NEXT NEXT NEXT 01 1 01 2 5 02 1 E 02 2 PREV PREV PREV Note The first part of a jack is for a DPT of a XDP assigned jack The second part is for a single line device Programme 600 EXtra Device Port assigns which jacks are XDP Storing your data Press STORE to store your data e The STORE indicator lights red and a confirmation tone is emitted Confirmation tone one beep After pressing STORE you will hear a beep This informs you that storage is completed Alarm tone three beeps If you hear this alarm y
254. receives incoming DDI calls 421 1 The number equals the number from the ISDN line minus the subscriber s number programmed in 418 13 Assigns whether an extension number or 0 DDI conversion 0 e CLIP a DDI number is used when a DDI call number e COLP is received or the CLIP and COLP 1 extension e DDI feature becomes available number 14 Allows or prevents dialing 0 when the 0 allow 1 None MSN number is 0 1 prevent 15 Selects the DDI call destination during 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI the day mode if it is not assigned 1 Operator 16 Selects the DDI call destination during 0 DIL 1 N 1 DDI the day mode if it is not assigned 1 Operator Optional Programming 413 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 07 1 Enables or disables the DTMF signals to 0 enable 1 None the ISDN line 1 disable 2 3 Reserved 4 Enables or disables the Whisper OHCA 0 any telephone 1 Whisper OHCA feature 1 KX T7400 series telephones only 5 Enables or disables the hooking signal 0 disable 1 None when the reverse signal does not return 1 enable 6 Reserved 7 Allows a beep or Music on Hold while 0 beep 1 Music on Hold holding a call 1 usual music source 9 8 Determines how the call is treated when 01 IRNA 11 DISA a call from DISA arrives at a DND 10 11 receive at extension or busy extension
255. ress gt or lt Features Guide References Absent Message Capability 46 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 009 Quick Dial Number Set Description Stores up to eight quick dial numbers Selection Default Location number 1 through 8 Desired number 16 digits max All location numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 009 Display 009 QUICK DIAL Press NEXT Display Location NO gt Enter a location number To enter location number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Not Stored Enter a desired number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions A maximum of sixteen digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and can be assigned to a quick dial number Before programming assign a feature number for each location first in programme 100 Flexible Numbering Features Guide References Quick Dialling General Programming 47 2 1 Manager Programming 014 VM Name Set Description Assigns a name for each voice mail port Selection e Voice Mail VM number KX TD816 01 through 12 KX TD1232 01 through 24 Name 10 characters max Default All Voice Mails V Mail xx xx 01 through 24
256. rmat number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty e To assign all DID formats to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID format number 1 Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID 218 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 448 DID First Dial Start Time for MFC R2 Description Assigns the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialling a Direct Inward Dialling DID number after an outside line is seized Selection e DID format number 1 through 8 X all DID TIE formats Time 1 through 255 X 32 milliseconds is the actual time Default All DID formats 2 Programming 1 Enter 448 Display 448 1ST DIAL TM 2 Press NEXT Display Format NO 3 Enter a DID format number To enter DID format number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 2 4 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another DID format press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID format number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e You cannot leave the entry empty e To assign all DID formats to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID format number 1 Features Guide References Direct In
257. rogramming 1 Enter 128 Display 128 PBX CODE 2 Press NEXT Display Code 3 Enter a PBX Code To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new code Press STORE Press END n A Conditions e Valid numbers for the PBX Code are 0 through 9 The PBX Code method is PBX Code Extension number Features Guide References TIE Line Service 98 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 129 E amp M Signal Assignment Description Assigns the E amp M signal There are three signals available Continuous Continuous E amp M Wink Immediate Pulsed Ans Pulsed E amp M with Answer Signal Wink only Pulsed No Ans Pulsed E amp M without Answer Signal Wink only Selection Continuous Pulsed Ans Pulsed No Ans Default Continuous Programming 1 Enter 129 Display 129 E amp M SIGNAL 2 Press NEXT Display example Continuous 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions If you select Pulsed Ans or Pulsed No Ans you must select Wink as the start type Features Guide References TIE Line Service General Programming 99 2 2 System Programming 130 Message Waiting Control Description Assigns the data ports which communicate with the Message Waiting Lamp Adaptor Unit KX TD194 Selection Default Unit TD194 number KX TD816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 6 Jack number KX TD81
258. rst Digit Time 133 146 Flash 190 FLASH button 12 405 410 Flash Time 190 Flexible CO Button Assignment 38 Flexible Numbering 53 Floating Number Assignment 277 Follow On ID 76 409 410 FWD DND button 38 416 G Group CO button 38 H Hold Recall Time 126 Hookswitch 405 Host PBX Access Codes 187 Hotel Application 106 Hunting Type 63 I Initial display 407 Inter Digit Time 134 146 Intercept Extension Day Night 185 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 129 185 409 Intercept Time 129 Intercom dial tone frequency 407 Inter digit pause for pulse dialling 407 Internal music source 407 IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer 129 185 409 ISDN Class of Service 331 ISDN Configuration 311 ISDN Data Assignment 295 ISDN Data Link Mode 313 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number 317 ISDN Extension Name Set 286 ISDN Extension Number Set 284 ISDN Extension Progress Tone 319 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode 309 ISDN Network Type Assignment 293 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment 301 ISDN Port Type 307 ISDN Ring Service Assignment 303 ISDN TEI Mode 315 J Jack number 15 Jog Dial 16 K KX TD170 68 291 343 KX TD174 68 291 343 KX TD180 68 291 343 KX TD184 68 291 343 KX TD185 68 291 343 KX TD188 68 170 172 197 291 300 326 343 346 351 KX TD194 100 104 KX TD197 KX TD198 Baud Rate Set 282 KX TD198 Baud Rate Set 282 KX TD280 68 291 343 KX TD286 68 291 343 KX TD290 68
259. rvices Digital Network ISDN Extension ISDN Programming 285 3 1 Manager Programming 013 ISDN Extension Name Set Description Assigns names to the ISDN extension numbers programmed in programme 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Selection Default Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 Name 10 characters max All ports Not stored Programming 1 Enter 013 Display 013 ISDN NAME 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter the first port number you can also press NEXT Display 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available 286 ISDN Programming 3 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Extension ISDN Programming 287 3 1 Manager Programming 018 Budget Management for ISDN Extension Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the ISDN extension port basis Selection Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 thro
260. s END Conditions None Features Guide References Call Forwarding Class of Service COS Optional Programming 419 5 1 Optional Programming 420 Optional Programming Section 6 Default Values Default Values 421 2 General Programming Programme Default 000 Date and Time Set 93 Jan 1 FRI 12 00 AM 12 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set All speed dial numbers Not stored 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set All speed dial numbers Not stored 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 101 through 116 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 201 through 216 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 101 through 164 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 201 through 264 004 Extension Name Set All jacks Not stored 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 Other CO buttons Not stored KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Operator 1 Jack 01 Operator 2 and Manager Not stored 007 Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment All consoles Not stored 008 Absent Messages 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext 4 Back at 5 Out Until 6 In a Meeting 7 through 9 Blank not stored 009 Quick Dial Nu
261. s NEXT Display example 1 Not Stored Enter an exceptional number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END 150 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions There is a maximum of five numbers for each programme Each number has a maximum of ten digits consisting of 0 through 9 and X The character X can be used as a wild card character Features Guide References Toll Restriction General Programming 151 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 311 Special Carrier Access Codes Description Assigns special carrier numbers This allows the system to recognise the user dialled special carrier number in order to insert the required pause and apply toll restriction Selection e Location number 01 through 20 e Special carrier number 7 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 311 Display 311 CARRIER 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a special carrier number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 T
262. s NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END ISDN Programming 333 3 4 Extension Programming Conditions e Forthe KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave 1f available e To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 4 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 e When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV the outside line number is not changed Example 03 C002 Pressing NEXT 04 CO02 Features Guide References Day Night Service Outside Line Connection Assignment Outgoing 334 ISDN Programming 3 4 Extension Programming 616 DDI Number ISDN Extension Number Conversion Description Used to convert a Direct Dialling In DDI number to an ISDN extension number in order to place an incoming DDI call at a specific extension Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD1232 01 through 12 DDI Number 6 digits max Default All ports Blank Programming 1 Enter 616 Display 616 ISDN DDI 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display 01 4 Enter a DDI number To
263. s before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part X all jacks e Number of rings 0 through 12 Default All jacks 0 Programming 1 Enter 619 Display 619 EXT FWD TIME 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 0 4 Enter the number of rings Display example 01 1 6 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Ifthe number of rings is assigned to 0 the time assigned on programme 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time will be used Asa timer on ISDN extension cannot be assigned on this programming the time assigned on programme 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time will be used General Programming 257 2 7 Extension Programming Features Guide References Call Forwarding 258 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 620 Lunch Break Group Assignment Description Assigns extensions for a lunch break group A lunch break group can be assigned to up to 8 extensions PT SLT Selection e Group number 1 through 8 e Location number 1 through 8 e Extension number 2 through 4 d
264. s case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 General Programming 235 2 6 COS Programming e Programme 105 Account Codes is used to define the Account Codes for the Verified modes Features Guide References Account Code Entry Toll Restriction 236 General Programming 2 6 COS Programming 509 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description Determines which Class of Service COS are allowed to perform the Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA and Whisper OHCA function Selection e COS number 1 through 8 X all COS e Enable Disable Default All COS Enable Programming 1 Enter 509 Display 509 OHCA 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA General Programming 237 2 6 COS Programming 510 Night Service Access Description Enables or disables switching the Day Night service on a Class of Service COS basis Selection COS
265. s parameter with the Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time Programme 206 parameter Programme 206 is used to set the duration time allowed for an outside to outside line call e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA 140 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 215 Outgoing Message Time Description Sets the maximum allowable recording time for Outgoing Messages OGM Selection Time seconds 0 16 32 64 O no recording Default 32 0 32 0 for OGM 1 through 4 from left to right Programming 1 Enter 215 Display 215 OGM MSG TIME Press NEXT to programme the time for OGM 1 Display example OGM 32 0 32 0 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed N Press m to programme the time for OGM 2 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Repeat steps 4 and 5 to programme the time for OGM s 3 and 4 Press STORE Press END LX XA A UN BR U Conditions e There are four messages available OGM 1 used for DISA Direct Inward System Access message 1 or UCD Uniform Call Distribution message 1 OGM 2 used for DISA message 2 or UCD message 2 OGM 3 used for Timed Reminder or UCD message 3 OGM 4 used for UCD message 4 Enter the times starting from the left for OGM 1 to OGM 4 e The total time of the outgoing messages cannot exceed 64 seconds Features Guide References
266. s the type of each port to either outside line or extension line on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 X all ports e CO outside line Extension Default All ports CO Programming 1 Enter 423 Display 423 ISDN TYPE 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 CO 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e For the KX TD816 port numbers 05 and 06 are fixed as Extension e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 e After this assignment you should reset the system to make this assignment effective ISDN Programming 307 3 3 ISDN Line Programming Features Guide References Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 308 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 424 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode Description Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on an ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 06 KX TD123
267. s the user to prevent Executive Busy Override from being executed by another extension user Selection e COS number 1 through 8 X all COS e Disable Enable Default All COS Enable Programming 1 Enter 506 Display 506 EXEC BSY DNY 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Features Guide References Executive Busy Override General Programming 233 2 6 COS Programming 507 Do Not Disturb Override Description Determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Do Not Disturb DND Override Selection e COS number 1 through 8 X X all COS e Disable Enable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 507 Display 507 DND OVERRIDE 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another COS press NEXT or PREV or SE
268. sabled for the ISDN line in programme 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment Your telephone number will be informed to the calling party if the COLP feature is enabled for the ISDN line in programme 990 System Additional Information Area 06 Bit 11 Features Guide References Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR El Line Service Incoming Outside Call Information Display 300 ISDN Programming 3 3 ISDN Line Programming 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment Description Assigns whether ISDN CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction service is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls If disabled the subscriber s number of your system is informed to the called party Selection Default Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines Enable Disable All outside lines Enable Programming 1 Enter 419 Display 419 ISDN CLIR Press NEXT Display CO Line NO Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Enable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To programme another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions For the KX
269. selection is displayed Press STORE Press END n A Conditions The external pager is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one external pager can be installed for KX TD1232 two external pagers can be installed per system External pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available Features Guide References Confirmation Tone Paging General Programming 271 2 8 Resource Programming 806 807 Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters Description Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface RS 232C for Port 1 for KX TD816 and Master System of KX TD1232 or Port 2 for Slave System of KX TD1232 New line code Select the code for your printer or personal computer If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return select CR If not select CR LF Baud rate A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer Word length A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character Parity A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer Stop bit A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of your printer or
270. show the reason for the user s absence Selection e Message number 1 through 9 e Message 16 characters max Default 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext 4 Back at 5 Out Until 6 In a Meeting 7 through 9 Blank not stored Programming 1 Enter 008 Display 008 ABSENT MSG 2 Press NEXT Display MSG NO 3 Enter a message number To enter message number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example MSG1 Will Return 4 Enter the message For entering characters see Section 1 4 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new message 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another message press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired message number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END General Programming 45 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions e Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed e You can enter a maximum of seven characters per message which can be programmed at each user s extension The extension user can enter 0 through 9 X and for the characters If the user enters digits less than the number of characters it is recommended to fill the remaining characters with or X e If there are 4 digit extension numbers available in your system add one to Message 3 e To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display p
271. side lines e Regular no detection Reverse detection Default Regular Programming 1 Enter 416 Display 416 REV CURRENT 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside line number To enter outside line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Regular 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another outside line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired outside line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all outside lines to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line 01 Features Guide References Reverse Circuit General Programming 195 2 5 Outside Line Programming 417 Outside Line Name Assignment Description Assigns a name to each outside line so that the extension user can view the outside line number and name when receiving an outside call If Caller ID is assigned each extension can select either the initial display Caller ID or outside line name by Station Programming Selection e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 54 X all outside lines Name 10 characters max Default All outside lines Not stored Programming 1 Enter 417 Display 417 CO LINE NAME 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter an outside
272. signment 171 Outside Line Name Assignment 196 Outside Line Number Assignment for ISDN E1 299 345 Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time 132 Outside to TIE Transfer 207 Overlay 12 13 P PAD Switch Control 408 PAUSE button 12 Pause Time 189 PBX Code 98 Phantom Extension button 38 Phantom Extension Message Waiting button 38 Phantom Extension Number Set 91 Pickup Dial Waiting Time 130 PREV PREVIOUS button 12 PRI Configuration 325 PRI Reference CO 326 351 PROGRAM button 12 Programming Example 23 Programming Instructions 10 Programming Methods 15 PT Programming Level 239 Pulse break ratio 406 Pulse dialling signals 408 Pulse feedback 408 Pulse mode 173 175 Pulse Speed Selection 175 Q Quick Dial Number Set 47 R Reverse Circuit Assignment 195 Ring Group hunting 63 Ringer frequency 39 ROM Version Display 78 Rotation of jack number 15 RS 232C 272 S Save button 38 SECRET button 12 Secret Dialling 31 SEL 12 SEL 12 SELECT button 12 SEL 12 Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters 272 SHIFT Button 11 Single CO button 38 SKP 16 SKP 16 SMDR Format 264 SMDR format for Caller ID call 411 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 262 SMDR Output Mode 281 SMDR printout account code 412 SMDR printout DID subscriber number 415 SMDR printout RC and AN 411 SMDR printout Timed Reminder 411 Soft Buttons 11 Special Carrier Access Codes 152 Station Hunting Type 63 Statio
273. sired selection number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 Ist through 16th extension blocks 1 Enter 100 2 Press NEXT 3 Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END General Programming 55 2 2 System Programming Conditions Required digits and valid entries for the feature numbers are as follows Feature number type Required digits Valid entry Extension blocks other 1 or 2 digits O through 9 PBX extensions TIE line access number 1 through 3 digits O through 9 Other feature numbers 1 through 3 digits O through 9 X It is possible to assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective extension blocks Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programmes 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 118 Voice Mail Extension Number Set 124 Phantom Extension Number Set and 813 Floating Number Assignment If X or is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry examples 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry examples 5 and 5 30 and 301 If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialling operation You can remove all the feature numbers except selections 01 through 16 To clear an extension block 01 t
274. ssing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE 8 Press END NJ Conditions e Itis necessary to connect a printer to the Serial Interface RS 232C port provided on the system e After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer within 10 seconds Otherwise the usage of the Serial Interface port is changed to system programming and printing will not occur e If Toll is selected the system will print out all the calls starting from the numbers stored in programmes 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 262 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR General Programming 263 2 8 Resource Programming 801 SMDR Format Description Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer Page length determines the number of lines per page Skip perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page Selection Page length lines 4 through 99 Skip perforation lines 0 through 95 Default Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 Programming 1 Enter 801 Display 801 SMDR FORMAT 2 Press NEXT to programme page length Display example Page Length 66 3 Enter the page length To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new page length 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to programme skip perfora
275. steps 4 through 6 Press END 148 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming Conditions e There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for each programme Each number has a maximum of ten digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character X can be used as a wild card character e Programmes 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 are used to assign exceptions to these numbers Programmes 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night are used to set the toll restriction value for each COS Features Guide References Toll Restriction General Programming 149 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description Selection These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll restriction specified in programmes 301 through 305 as follows Programme 306 applies to level 2 Programme 307 Programme 308 Programme 309 Programme 310 Default All locations Not stored applies to levels 2 through 3 applies to levels 2 through 4 applies to levels 2 through 5 applies to levels 2 through 6 Location number 1 through 5 Exceptional number 10 digits max Programming 1 Enter a programme address 306 through 310 Display example 306 TRS ALLOW 2 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 1 you can also pres
276. system programmings Section 6 Default Values Provides the list of default values for all programmings Section 7 Index Provides the programming titles important words and phrases to help you access the required information easily About the other manuals Along with this Programming Guide the following manuals are available to help you install know the available features and use the KX TD816 KX TD1232 system Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and optional equipment Features Guide Provides information about the system features User Manual Provides operating instructions for the end users using proprietary telephones single line telephones or consoles 2 Introduction Table of Contents 1 Programming Instructions ocooccoooonncconnonnccnnnanaconnonononocinncconacccananrans Y 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 Programming Instructions ccccsccsssssscsssssscsssssscsssscsescsssssscssesescsssssssssssssssssessssses 10 Using Proprietary Telephones ccsccsssssscssssssscssscsssssscssccssscsscsseccsssssscsssssessssns 11 Programming Methods 3 05 scscciscesiscccesisncesectasesstee5cesoseccosessesesnsacesenseccenerceceaevsseecesuvedsess 15 Entering Characters iii AS ados seais 17 User Programming Mode ccccccsccscccescscescssssccosssecosssacceesvaccessvanseseseccessestecsiesseccoesessesesss 22 Programming Example wo ceisccsccccecsiccsestesccssvessosdsoccesecdcontesc
277. t 3 6 Press STORE Press END NJ Conditions There is a maximum of either 420 toll call numbers for Denied Code Table or a maximum of 405 toll call numbers for Excepted Code Table Features Guide References Toll Restriction 162 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 333 TRS Entry Code Assignment for Extra Table Description Used to specify the numbers for extra Denied or Excepted Code Table for expansion Selection e Location number 001 through 400 e Toll call number 10 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 333 Display 333 TRS EXTRA 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a toll call number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of either 420 toll call numbers for Denied Code Table or a maximum of 405 toll call numbers for Excepted Code Table Each number has a maximum of ten digits consisting of 0 through 9 and X The character X can be used as a wild card character Features Guide References Toll Restriction General Programming 163
278. t Service Starting Time 58 Day Night Service Switching Mode 57 DDI Extension Name Set 112 DDI Number Extension Number Conversion 328 DDI Number Floating Number Conversion 330 DDI Number ISDN Extension Number Conversion 335 DDI Number Phantom Extension Number Conversion 294 DDI Number Assignment 108 DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment 305 Delayed Ringing 247 Dial Mode Selection 173 Dial mode call blocking 173 Dial mode DTMF 173 Dial mode Pulse 173 Dial Start Time 137 438 Index Dial tone 405 410 415 DID DDI Extension Name Set 112 DID DDI Extension Day Night 110 DID DDI Number Assignment 108 DID TIE Added Number 204 DID TIE Format Number Assignment 198 DID TIE Incoming Assignment 199 DID TIE Outgoing Assignment 201 DID TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit 203 DID TIE Wink Time Out Assignment 205 DID Backward Group A Signal Code for MFC R2 222 DID Backward Group B Signal Code for MFC R2 223 DID Backward Timer for MFC R2 217 DID Disappearance Timer for MFC R2 218 DID Extension Day Night 110 DID First Dial Start Time for MFC R2 219 DID Forward Group I Signal Code for MFC R2 220 DID Forward Group II Signal Code for MFC R2 221 DID Forward Timer for MFC R2 216 DID Number Conversion Selection 107 DID Transfer Table for DDI Call 298 DIL Direct In Lines 183 224 247 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 183 DIL 1 1 Lunch Br
279. the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of eight Classes of Service Every extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming of programmes 5XX and 991 e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable General Programming 243 2 7 Extension Programming e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number in Section 1 3 Programming Methods e To assign all jacks to one COS press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Programme 017 DISA TIE User Codes is also used to assign a Class of Service to a DISA Direct Inward System Access TIE User Code Features Guide References Class of Service COS 244 General Programming 2 7 Extension Programming 602 Extension Group Assignment Description Assigns each extension to an extension group Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup Station Hunting and Paging Group Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 X KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e
280. the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Display example DSS 1 02 P 03 7 Press STORE 8 To programme another console press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired console number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END General Programming 43 2 1 Manager Programming Conditions e The jack number for the console and that for the paired extension must be entered together e Multiple consoles cannot be assigned to the same console jack e Multiple consoles can be paired with the same proprietary telephone jack e A console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of manager set in programme 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment e Ifallincoming outside calls are set to ring at the operator extension telephone in programme 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night assigning a console to the operator extension makes the operator s job much easier e Jfa single line telephone is assigned as the pair extension the paired console will not function e Ifa console assigned jack is programmed for eXtra Device Port XDP a single line telephone can be connected to the jack in parallel with the console Features Guide References Console 44 General Programming 2 1 Manager Programming 008 Absent Messages Description Used to programme the absent messages An absent message if set by the extension user is displayed on the calling extension s telephone to
281. therwise the previous setting will remain 68 General Programming 2 2 System Programming Features Guide References None General Programming 69 2 2 System Programming 110 Caller ID Code Set Description Sets the identification code of the calling party Caller ID Code to utilise a Caller ID Service provided by a specific central office CO If an ID Code transmitted from the CO is found in the Caller ID Code Table the caller s ID Code or name given to the code in programme 111 Caller ID Name Set is displayed on the telephone This allows the called party to recognise the caller Selection e Location number 001 through 500 e Caller ID Code 24 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter 110 Display 110 CALLER ID 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a Caller ID Code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each Caller ID Code has a maximum of 24 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e Programme 111 Caller ID Name Set is used to give names to the Caller ID Codes If an ID Code is
282. thod 2 is useful when you wish to jump to another programme address For example you have just finished with programme 006 and now you want to go to programme 301 Neither SKP VOLUME V nor SKP VOLUME A is convenient in this case So you should press END and enter 301 Note The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode and that you will use Method b Confirming the entries You may review the stored programming without making any changes Going back to the operation mode Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode a Lift the handset while in programming mode b When the Initial Message SYS PGM NO is displayed press the PROGRAM or PAUSE button To display the Initial Message press END 16 Programming Instructions 1 4 Entering Characters 1 4 Entering Characters Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names or messages by using the dialling key pad buttons or the Jog Dial See the Combination Tables below Combination Table a Soft button SHIFT S1 SHIFT S2 SHIFT S3 SHIFT SHIFT S1 SHIFT SHIFT S2 SELECT button pressing times a at zl ol olo X C O Z A T MIUIN X lt X lt D O P moO X C Q 5D X T OJO N O O O0O J O OI B2B O N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 go Programming Instruc
283. tion Display example Skip Perf 0 6 Enter the skip perforation To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new skip perforation 7 Press STORE Press END oo Conditions e The page length should be four lines or more longer than the skip perforation length e A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page e The programmed format becomes valid only if the Serial Interface RS 232C cable is connected If a printer is already connected disconnect it and connect again Otherwise the former format becomes valid Features Guide References Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 264 General Programming 2 8 Resource Programming 802 System Data Printout Description Starts or stops printing the system data All or a specific range of the current system programmed data is printed out The ranges are as follows Manager Manager Programming OXX System System Programming 1XX Timers Timer Programming 2XX TRS ARS TRS ARS Programming 3XX Outside line Outside Line Programming 4XX COS COS Programming 5XX Extension Extension Programming 6XX El El Programming 7XX Resource Resource Programming 8XX Option Option Programming 9XX Selection e Printout range number X All 0 Manager 1 System 2 Timer 3 TRS ARS 4 Outside line 5 COS 6 Extension 7 E1 8 Resource 9 Option e Start Stop Default Not applicable Progra
284. tions 17 1 4 Entering Characters Combination Table b Jog Dial Display sequence by rotating the Jog Dial Q A D G Ji M P T W w Xx Y y Z z space space 0 lye I lt gt amp 0 AaBob 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ok e The alphabetical characters correspond to the letters shown on the twelve dialling keys on the proprietary telephone except symbols In Combination Table b If you keep rotating the Jog Dial all of the characters in the table will be displayed Character Entering Methods Please see the following example which shows how to select a desired character For example to select the letter M Select either of the following three methods 1 Using the SHIFT and Soft buttons for KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 KX T7235 only See Combination Table a a Press 6 M belongs to 6 e The Function Line shows MN O b Press the Soft 1 M button Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters 2 Using the SELECT button See Combination Table a a Press 6 M belongs to 6 b Press the SELECT button once Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of times gives you the desired letter Pressing SELECT twice gives the letter m pressing three times gives N and so on 18 Programming Instructions 1 4 Entering Characters 3 Using the Jog Dial for KX T7433 KX T7436 only See C
285. tween digits on an outgoing toll call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency receiver is released This timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed Selection Time seconds 5 through 30 Default 10s Programming 1 Enter 208 Display 208 INTER DIGIT 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Toll Restriction 134 General Programming 2 3 Timer Programming 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times Description Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried Automatic redialling of the last dialled or saved number is done up to the specified number of times Selection Number of times 1 through 30 Default KX TD816BX KX TD1232 D BX ML KX TDN1232 10 times KX TD816HK KX TD1232HK 3 times KX TD1232X 2 times Programming 1 Enter 209 Display 209 AUTO RD QTY 2 Press NEXT Display example Attempt 10 3 Enter the number of times To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number of times 4 Press STORE Press END u Conditions e Programme 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time is used to set the interval time between Automatic Redi
286. ugh 12 X all ports e Charge limitation Charge 0 through 99999999 Default All ports 0 Programming 1 Enter 018 Display 018 BUDGET ISDN 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 0 6 4 Enter a charge limitation To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e If the charge limitation is set 0 no restriction is applied e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for port 01 e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e The displayed currency can be programmed by 144 Currency Assignment 288 ISDN Programming 3 1 Manager Programming Features Guide References Budget Management Charge Fee Reference ISDN Programming 289 3 2 System Programming 3 2 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the unit in each expansion unit location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 C 4CO S2 280 S6 6 S0 BD 4 DID Pulse DTMF MD 4 DID MFC EM 4 E M
287. ugh 32 e DISA TIE user code 4 through 10 digits e COS number 1 through 8 Default All DISA TIE user code numbers DISA TIE user code Blank COS number 8 Programming 1 Enter 017 Display 017 USER CODES 2 Press NEXT Display User Code NO gt 3 Enter a DISA TIE user code number To enter user code number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Gre 4 Enter a DISA TIE user code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new code 5 Press m to programme COS 6 Enter a COS number To change the current entry enter the new COS number 7 Press STORE General Programming 51 2 1 Manager Programming 8 To programme another user code press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DISA TIE user code number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions This setting is required if Trunk Outside line Security mode is selected in programmes 439 TIE Security Type and 809 DISA Security Type e Each code should be unique and composed of four through ten numerical digits 0 through 9 e You cannot leave an entry empty Features Guide References Direct Inward System Access DISA TIE Line Service 52 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Description Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features Feature Number List
288. uivalent to five seconds e Select 0 if Call Park Recall is not required e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References Call Park General Programming 145 2 3 Timer Programming 220 TIE First Inter Digit Time Description Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of the dial tone and the first digit dialled First Digit Time and between digits Inter Digit Time on an TIE call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released This timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed Selection Time seconds 3 through 30 Default 5s Programming 1 Enter 220 Display 220 TIE TIMER 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 5 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Features Guide References TIE Line Service Toll Restriction 146 General Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialling Description Allows you to enable toll restriction override for System Speed Dial Numbers If this is enabled all extension users can make System Speed Dialling calls with no restriction Selection Enable Disable Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 300 Display 300
289. ult 755 El Answer Decision Timer 001 756 El Seizure ACK Wait Timer 05 757 El Pulse Type Type A 758 El DR2 Signalling Type Normal 759 El Inter Digit Timer 05 760 El Bit Position for Dial Pulse A bit 761 El Bit Position for Clear Back A bit 762 El E amp M Signalling Type Type 2 763 El E amp M Pulse Length Seizure 150 ms 764 El E amp M Pulse Length Answer 600 ms 765 El E amp M Pulse Length Clear 600 ms 766 El Meter Pulse Detection Mode No Detection 767 El Meter Pulse Detection Bit Position B bit 768 El Meter Pulse Detection Length 16 769 El DSP Gain DTMF Transmit 03 770 El DSP Gain DTMF Receive 16 771 El DSP Gain MFC R2 Transmit 16 772 El DSP Gain MFC R2 Receive 08 773 El Frame Error Detection No 774 El Error Rate 0 775 El ANI Service Mode None 776 El ANI Maximum Digits 00 777 El MFC R2 Forward Timer 15s 778 El MFC R2 Backward Timer 15 s Default Values 435 Programme Default 779 El MFC R2 Disappearance Timer 24 s 780 El Group I Parameter 01 14 Parameter 02 15 Parameter 03 12 781 El Group I Parameter 02 Subscriber Other parameters Undefined 782 El Group A Parameter 01 03 Parameter 02 05 Parameter 03 06 Other parameters 00 783 El Group B Parameter 01 01 Parameter 05 02 Parameter 06 03 Parameter 07 and 08 04 Other parameters 00 784 El Group C All Parameters 00
290. umber 1 through 8 Number to be added 20 digits max Default All modification tables Not stored Programming 1 Enter 331 Display 331 ARS ADD S 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table 3 Enter a modification table number To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 4 Enter the number to be added To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of eight Modification Tables each of which can be given a number to be added Each number has a maximum of 20 digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and PAUSE Features Guide References Automatic Route Selection ARS General Programming 161 2 4 TRS ARS Programming 332 Extra Entry Table Selection Description Selects the code table which enables an extra 400 entries within Denied or Except Code Table Selection e Deny Except Level number 2 through 6 Default Except 2 Programming 1 Enter 332 Display 332 TRS EXTRA 2 Press NEXT Display example Table Except 2 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press m to enter a level number 5 Enter a level number Display example Table Excep
291. unt Start Time oooooonnoconcncnononononnnnnonnnnnnannnnnnononnononnn nono nonnononananononos 138 213 DISA Delayed Answer Time racine innia prei Na raoe 139 214 DISA Prolong Time eaei ss 140 215 Outsomg Message TIME cis 0e tes sce civ ti ame Ree 141 216 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time cee eeeeseeeeeeeneecnseceaeceseesseceeeeseeeeeeeaes 142 217 Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time ou eee eeccecseceeseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeseaaeceeaeeceeeeesas 143 278 DISACAA Wait Time eA cc ie eae ea EE 144 219 Call Park Recall mec ad a Gi hess a dsdee bcs oe SEs RS 145 220 TIE First Inter Digit Times secera ia a E a Ea E aas 146 2 4 TRS 7 ARS Programming jsseciscscssssssencesconsssescoscsedssensevsecesotessnadcsanseseccseodsssseissesecseness 147 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialling eeeeeeceneeeeeceneceeeeeneeeseeeeeeeaes 147 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 0 0 ee eee eeeeesecnteceeceeeeeees 148 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through oonoconicnnnncnncnnonncnnnnicncnanosn 150 Table of Contents 311 Special Carrier Access Codes minini eairt a EE A EEE i 152 AA ARS Mode Cocures porin A AT 153 III ARS TM A AA N E E AEEA 154 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 oooooncnnnnnnnccnnnccnnncooncconcnanccnnos 156 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 oononocnnnnnnncinocononaconnconnconncanonona nono nono conc conan 158 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit
292. ur access codes per outside line group Each code has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 and X e Ifconflicting access codes such as 8 and 81 are stored for the same outside line group the 1 digit code 8 only will be in effect e When the programmed codes are dialled Automatic Pause Insertion and Toll Restriction are applied to the calls The programmed pause time in programme 412 Pause Time is automatically inserted after the access code e To assign all outside line groups to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for outside line group 1 Features Guide References External Feature Access Host PBX Access Pause Insertion Automatic 188 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 412 Pause Time Description Assigns the length of the pause time The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access number or a host PBX access code programmed in 411 Host PBX Access Codes or manually inserted if the PAUSE button is pressed by the user Selection e Outside line group TRG number 1 through 8 X all outside line groups Time seconds 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 Default All outside line groups 1 5 s Programming 1 Enter 412 Display 412 PAUSE TIME 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter an outside line group number To enter outside line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example T
293. ward Dialling DID General Programming 219 2 5 Outside Line Programming 449 DID Forward Group I Signal Code for MFC R2 Description Assigns a Direct Inward Dialling DID call forward group I signal code according to your central office service Selection e Code number 01 through 15 Not Use Dial 1 Dial 2 Dial 3 Dial 4 Dial 5 Dial 6 Dial 7 Dial 8 Dial 9 Dial 0 Default Code 01 Dial 1 Code 02 Dial 2 Code 03 Dial 3 Code 04 Dial 4 Code 05 Dial 5 Code 06 Dial 6 Code 07 Dial 7 Code 08 Dial 8 Code 09 Dial 9 Code 10 Dial 0 Code 11 to Code 15 Not Use Programming 1 Enter 449 Display 449 FWD SIGN GP1 2 Press NEXT Display Code NO gt 3 Enter a code number To enter code number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 0l Dial 1 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another code press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired code number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions None Features Guide References Direct Inward Dialling DID 220 General Programming 2 5 Outside Line Programming 450 DID Forward Group II Signal Code for MFC R2 Description Assigns a Direct Inward Dialling DID call backward group II signal code according to your central office service Selection e Code number 01 through 15 e Not Use Subscriber Operator Collect collect call
294. which has the CO button disabled Call Waiting only flashes 00 busy tone is sent 414 Optional Programming 5 1 Optional Programming Explanation Area Bit Description Selection Default Features Guide References 07 11 10 Determines how the call is treated when 01 IRNA 11 DID a call from DID arrives at a DND 10 11 receive at extension or busy extension which has the CO button disabled Call Waiting If IRNA whose only flashes destination is DISA is selected a reorder 00 busy tone is tone is sent sent 13 12 Determines how the call is treated when 01 IRNA 11 ISDN a call from ISDN line arrives ata DND 10 11 receive at extension or busy extension which has the CO button disabled Call Waiting only flashes 00 busy tone is sent 15 14 Determines how the call is treated when 01 IRNA 11 TIE Line Service a call from TIE line arrives at a Do Not 10 11 receive at Disturb DND extension or busy the CO button extension which has disabled Call only flashes Waiting If IRNA whose destination is 00 busy tone is DISA is selected a reorder tone is sent sent 16 Enables or disables the SMDR printout 0 enable 1 SMDR for DID subscriber number A DID 1 disable subscriber number replaces a Caller ID number 08 1 Sends a dial tone to another system 0 send 1 TIE Line Service when a channel assigned on TIE is 1 not send captured 2 Reserved 3 Sends a dial tone to
295. which outside line number system data each PRI line or El line uses After assigning this programme the following programme data will become available for PRI outside lines 25 through 54 e 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night e 419 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment e 420 ISDN Ring Service Assignment e 421 DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment e 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night e 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night e 614 615 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension After assigning this programme the following programme data will become available for El outside lines 25 through 54 e 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night e 457 458 DIL 1 1 Lunch Break Group e 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night e 605 606 Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day Night This programme is only available for the KX TD1232 with the Primary Rate Interface ISDN Expansion Unit KX TD290 or with the E1 Unit KX TD188 Selection e PRI El outside line CO number 25 through 54 X all outside lines e Outside line CO number 01 through 24 Default All outside lines PRI El line CO 09 Programming 1 Enter 721 Display 721 REFERENCE CO 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter the PRI E1 outside line number Display example CO25 09 A
296. with Pulse DTMF KX TD185 MD 4 DID lines with MFC KX TD185 EM 4 E amp M lines KX TD184 EL 1 El line KX TD188 E El E2 8 Extension lines KX TD170 A Al A2 16 SLT lines KX TD174 e There are two expansion areas in the KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top One extension line unit and one outside line CO ISDN SO DID E amp M unit can be installed e There are three expansion areas in each system for the KX TD1232 areas 1 2 and 3 from bottom to top Up to two extension line units and one outside line CO ISDN S0 E1 DID E amp M unit can be installed The KX TD188 and KX TD290 can only be installed to the KX TD1232 Master system In this case the basic and extended outside line in the Slave system cannot be used e Ifthe KX TD290 is installed to the KX TD1232 Master system the KX TD280 or KX TD286 can be installed to the Slave system only to use the ISDN extension lines e An out of service system is unassignable In this case skip steps 8 and 9 for the KX TD1232 e For the KX TD1232 if only the Slave system is in operation the display shows Slave in step 2 e After changing the setting turn the Power Switch off and on once Otherwise the previous setting will remain El Programming 343 4 1 System Programming Features Guide References None 344 El Programming 4 2 El Outside Line Programming 4 2 El Outside Line Programming 418 Outside Line Number Ass
297. xtension All incoming calls from the programmed outside lines are directed to the specified extensions These programmes assign the extensions and the notification method for each outside line in both day and night modes Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 X KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Outside line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all outside lines e Disab disable Immdt immediate ringing IRNG 1 ring delay 3RNG 3 ring delay 6RNG 6 ring delay NORNG no ring Default All jacks 1 2 All outside lines Immediate ringing Day Night Programming 1 Enter a programme address 603 for day or 604 for night Display example 603 DIL 1 N DAY 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 C001 Immdt 4 Enter the outside line number You can also keep pressing gt or lt until the desired outside line number is displayed 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To programme another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 General Programming 247 2 7 Extension Programming 9 Press END Cond
298. y X every day of the week e Hour 1 through 12 Disable no switching e Minute 0 through 59 e AM PM Default Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 00 PM Programming 1 Enter 102 Display 102 DAY NT CLOCK 2 Press NEXT Display Day of Week 3 Enter the day of the week selection number To select Sunday you can also press NEXT Display example Sun Day 9 00 AM To select night mode press NEXT Display example Sun Nig 5 00 PM 4 Enter the hour To set no switching keep pressing SELECT until Disable is displayed and go to step 9 If SELECT is pressed the display shows the previous entry If the previous setting was Disable press SELECT to enter the starting time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time 5 Press m gt 6 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new minutes 7 Press gt 8 Press SELECT for AM or PM 9 Press STORE 58 General Programming 2 2 System Programming 10 To programme another day night mode or day of the week press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the day of the week selection number 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 12 Press END Conditions e To select the desired day you may keep pressing NEXT in step 3 To assign every day of the week to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday e If day night switchi
299. you can also press NEXT Display example CH01 Pulse 10 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another channel press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired channel number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Adjust to a setting of the connected telephone company e To assign all channels to one selection press the X key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for channel 01 El Programming 357 4 4 El Line Programming Features Guide References El Line Service 358 El Programming 4 4 El Line Programming 742 El CPC IN Description Sets a CPC signal detection time to each El channel on receiving a call This programme is available for the KX TD1232 only Selection e El channel number 01 through 30 X All El channels Time 00 through 15 X 80 milliseconds is the actual time 00 no detection Default All El channels 02 Programming 1 Enter 742 Display 742 El CPC IN 2 Press NEXT Display CH NO gt 3 Enter a channel number To enter a channel number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CH01 02 4 Enter a time To assign no time press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To programme another channel press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired channel number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Adjust to a setting of the conn
300. ystem Programming 127 Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Call Description Assigns removed digits from the received caller s number of a long distance call and adds number to make the final number which serves as the Caller ID number The system records the modified caller s number to the incoming call log list so that the extension user can call back the caller Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received digits Selection e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 9 O no deletion Number to be added 4 digits max Default Deleted digits 0 Added number Blank Programming 1 Enter 127 Display 127 CID LD 2 Press NEXT Display example Del Add 0 3 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 4 Press gt to programme the number to be added if required 5 Enter the number to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 6 Press STORE 7 Press END Conditions The added number has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and Features Guide References Caller ID Call Log Incoming General Programming 97 2 2 System Programming 128 PBX Code Description Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the PBX Code method is employed for TIE Line Network calling Selection PBX Code 1 through 3 digits Default Not stored P

Digital Super Hybrid System Programming Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents